Difference between revisions of "Question Types in BetterExaminations"

From Blackboard Wiki
Jump to: navigation, search
(True or False)
(Overview)
 
(176 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 45: Line 45:
 
#Create the available answer choices under '''Multiple choice options'''. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
 
#Create the available answer choices under '''Multiple choice options'''. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
 
<div><ul>  
 
<div><ul>  
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_1.png|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']] </li>
+
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_1.png|alt="Composing question and responses for a multiple choice question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']] </li>
 
</ul></div>
 
</ul></div>
 
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
 
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
 
:4. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers) or change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling ''Multiple responses''.
 
:4. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers) or change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling ''Multiple responses''.
 
<div><ul>  
 
<div><ul>  
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_2.png|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']] </li>
+
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_2.png|alt="Answer options for multiple a choice question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']] </li>
 
</ul></div>
 
</ul></div>
 
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
Line 56: Line 56:
 
:7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 
:7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 
<div><ul>  
 
<div><ul>  
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_3.png|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7''']] </li>
+
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_3.png|alt="More options for a multiple choice question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7''']] </li>
 
</ul></div>
 
</ul></div>
 
:8. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 
:8. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 
:9. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 
:9. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 
<div><ul>  
 
<div><ul>  
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_4.png|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']] </li>
+
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_4.png|alt="Layout and selection & extra options for a multiple choice question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']] </li>
 
</ul></div>
 
</ul></div>
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 69: Line 69:
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
<div><ul>  
 
<div><ul>  
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_5.png|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']] </li>
+
<li style="display: inline-block;"> [[File:Multiple_choice_5.png|alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']] </li>
 
</ul></div>
 
</ul></div>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
Line 76: Line 76:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#Create the available answer choices under the '''Multiple choice options''' options. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
 
#Create the available answer choices under the '''Multiple choice options''' options. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
[[File:Multiple_response_1.png |thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
+
[[File:Multiple_response_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a multiple response question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box to the left of the correct answers.  
 
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box to the left of the correct answers.  
Line 82: Line 82:
 
'''Note:''' The points set will be for each individual correct answer as the question has multiple correct responses. For example, setting the points to 1 for a question with 2 correct responses will set the total score of the question to 2 points.  
 
'''Note:''' The points set will be for each individual correct answer as the question has multiple correct responses. For example, setting the points to 1 for a question with 2 correct responses will set the total score of the question to 2 points.  
 
:4. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers).
 
:4. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers).
[[File:Multiple_response_2.png |thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
+
[[File:Multiple_response_2.png |alt="Answer options for a multiple response question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 
:6. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 
:6. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 
:7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 
:7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
[[File:Multiple_response_3.png |thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7''']]
+
[[File:Multiple_response_3.png |alt="More options for a multiple response question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7''']]
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
:8. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size.
 
:8. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size.
 
:9. In the '''Extras''' section, you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 
:9. In the '''Extras''' section, you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
[[File:Multiple_response_4.png |thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
+
[[File:Multiple_response_4.png |alt="Layout and selection & extra options for a multiple response question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
:10. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 
:10. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
[[File:Multiple_response_5.png |thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']]
+
[[File:Multiple_response_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']]
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
Line 103: Line 103:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#Use the provided answer choices, true and false. If you would like to add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last response option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
 
#Use the provided answer choices, true and false. If you would like to add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last response option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
+
[[File:True_false_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a true or falsequestion"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers) which may not be necessary for this question type.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
#For scoring type, keep it as '''Exact match''', as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
#Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
:6. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
[[File:True_false_2.png |alt="Answer options and more options for a true or false question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-6''']]
 
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
:7. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:8. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:True_false_3.png |alt="Layout and selection & extra options for a true or false question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7 & 8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
:10. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
+
:9. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 +
 
 +
:10. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:True_false_4.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 122: Line 129:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#Create the available answer choices under '''Multiple choice options'''. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
 
#Create the available answer choices under '''Multiple choice options'''. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
+
[[File:Multiple_choice_block_layout_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a multiple choice - block layout question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers) or change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling ''Multiple responses''.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
#For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.
+
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
#Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question.
+
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
+
  
 +
:3.Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
 +
:4. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers) or change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling ''Multiple responses''.
 +
[[File:Multiple_choice_block_layout_2.png |alt="Answer options for a multiple choice - block layout question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
 +
:6. For scoring type, keep it as '''Exact match''', as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.
 +
:7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Multiple_choice_block_layout_3.png |alt="More options for a multiple choice - block layout question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7 ''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 +
:8. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question.
 +
:9. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
 +
[[File:Multiple_choice_block_layout_4.png |alt="Layout and selection & extra options for a multiple choice - block layout question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9 ''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
Line 135: Line 152:
  
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Multiple_choice_block_layout_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11 ''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Choice Matrix - Standard===
 
===Choice Matrix - Standard===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Create the different question statements (stems). To add more statements, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
+
#Create the different question statements under the '''Stems''' section. To add more statements, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
 
#Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false) under '''Options'''.  
 
#Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false) under '''Options'''.  
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.  
+
[[File:Choice_matrix_standard_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a choice matrix - standard question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of questions).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.
+
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and change the ''Font size''.
+
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
+
  
 +
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.
 +
:5. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of questions) and change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling ''Multiple responses''.
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_standard_2.png |alt="Answer options for a choice matrix - standard question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_standard_3.png |alt="More options for a choice matrix - standard question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and change the ''Font size''.
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_standard_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a choice matrix - standard question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
Line 154: Line 183:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_standard_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 159: Line 190:
 
This question type is identical to the standard choice matrix question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. This question type has the options inline as opposed in the question header ( the options are not in the column header, they are located to the right of the checkboxes).
 
This question type is identical to the standard choice matrix question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. This question type has the options inline as opposed in the question header ( the options are not in the column header, they are located to the right of the checkboxes).
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Create the different question statements (stems). To add more statements, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
+
#Create the different question statements under the '''Stems''' section. To add more statements, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
#Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false).  
+
#Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false) under '''Options'''.
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.  
+
[[File:Choice_matrix_inline_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a choice matrix - inline question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of questions).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of questions) and change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling ''Multiple responses''.
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust the font size.  
+
[[File:Choice_matrix_inline_2.png |alt="Answer options for a choice matrix - inline question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_inline_3.png |alt="More options for a choice matrix - inline question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust the ''Font size''.  
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_inline_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a choice matrix - inline question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 174: Line 216:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_inline_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 180: Line 225:
 
This question type is identical to the standard choice matrix question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. This question type has the options inline as opposed in the question header ( the options are not in the column header, they are located to the right of the checkboxes).
 
This question type is identical to the standard choice matrix question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. This question type has the options inline as opposed in the question header ( the options are not in the column header, they are located to the right of the checkboxes).
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Create the different question statements (stems). To add more statements, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
+
#Create the different question statements under the '''Stems''' section. To add more statements, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
#Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false).  
+
#Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false) under '''Options'''.  
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.  
+
[[File:Choice_matrix_labels_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a choice matrix - labels question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of questions) and add ''Multiple responses'' for the question.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of questions) and add ''Multiple responses'' for the question.
#Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can change the display formatting of the question.
+
[[File:Choice_matrix_labels_2.png |alt="Answer options for a choice matrix - labels question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_labels_3.png |alt="More options for a choice matrix - labels question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question.
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_labels_4.png |alt="Layout and extras options for a choice matrix - labels question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 195: Line 251:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Choice_matrix_labels_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 200: Line 259:
 
===Cloze with Drag & Drop===
 
===Cloze with Drag & Drop===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Enter the question text in the ''Template markup'' field. To add the response field click on the text field and click the ''r'' symbol enclosed in a dotted box to add it to the text field. The response box cannot be moved once inserted, so make sure you place it appropriately. To delete it, simply select it and click the ''backspace'' key on your keyboard.  
+
#Enter the question text in the ''Template markup'' field. To add the response field click on the text field and click the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to add it to the text field. The response box can be moved. To delete it, simply select it and click the ''backspace'' key on your keyboard.  
 
#Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
 
#Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by dragging and dropping the responses in the correct location.
+
[[File:Cloze_with_drag_and_drop_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a cloze with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by dragging and dropping the responses in the correct location.
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers), ''Duplicate responses'', toggle whether to ''Show drag handle'', and an option to ''Match all possible responses''.
#Under '''Layout ''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Cloze_with_drag_and_drop_2.png |alt="Answer options for a cloze with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5 ''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_drag_and_drop_3.png |alt="More options for a cloze with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout ''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_drag_and_drop_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a cloze with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 215: Line 285:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_drag_and_drop_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Cloze with Drop-Down===
 
===Cloze with Drop-Down===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Enter the question text in the ''Template markup'' field. To add the response field click on the text field and click the r symbol enclosed in a dotted box to add it to the text field. The response box cannot be moved once inserted, so make sure you place it appropriately. To delete it, simply select it and click the ''backspace'' key on your keyboard.  
+
#Enter the question text in the ''Template markup'' field. To add the response field click on the text field and click the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to add it to the text field. The response box can be moved. To delete it, simply select it and click the ''backspace'' key on your keyboard.  
 
#Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. For each response, add a number of selectable responses from the drop-down. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
 
#Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. For each response, add a number of selectable responses from the drop-down. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by dragging and dropping the responses in the correct location.
+
[[File:Cloze_with_drop_down_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a cloze with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by selecting them from the drop-down.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers), ''Duplicate responses'', toggle whether to ''Show drag handle'', and an option to ''Match all possible responses''.
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
[[File:Cloze_with_drop_down_2.png |alt="Answer options for a cloze with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_drop_down_3.png |alt="More options for a cloze with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_drop_down_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a cloze with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 234: Line 318:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_drop_down_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Cloze with Text===
 
===Cloze with Text===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Enter the question text in the ''Template markup'' field. To add a response field, click on the text field and click the r symbol enclosed in a dotted box to add it to the text field. The response box cannot be moved once inserted, so make sure you place it appropriately. To delete it, simply select it and click the ''backspace'' key on your keyboard.  
+
#Enter the question text in the ''Template markup'' field. To add a response field, click on the text field and click the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to add it to the text field. The response box can be moved. To delete it, simply select it and click the ''backspace'' key on your keyboard.  
#Enter the appropriate responses under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section. You can set up alternate answers for the question by clicking the '''+''' button next to the ''Correct'' box. This is useful when the order of the responses is not important.  
+
 
#Set the points required for the correct answer.
+
[[File:Cloze_with_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a cloze with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as toggle whether or not the answers are case sensitive by toggling ''Case sensitive''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
 
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:3. Enter the appropriate responses under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section. You can set up alternate answers for the question by clicking the '''+''' button next to the ''Correct'' box. This is useful when the order of the responses is not important.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle the feature to accept ''Special characters'', set the question to be ''Multiple line'', adjust ''Font size''. and whether or not you would like to toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction''.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
[[File:Cloze_with_text_2.png |alt="Answer options for a cloze with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as toggle whether or not the answers are case sensitive by toggling ''Case sensitive''.  
 +
:6. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:7.You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_text_3.png |alt="More options for a cloze with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:8. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle the feature to accept ''Special characters'', set the question to be ''Multiple line'', adjust ''Font size''. and whether or not you would like to toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction''.  
 +
:9. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_text_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a cloze with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 252: Line 351:
  
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_with_text_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 257: Line 359:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
#Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response containers''' section. You can adjust the number of answers per field by specifying the number in the ''Maximum responses per container'' field.  
+
[[File:Label_image_with_drag_and_drop_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a label image with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by dragging and dropping the responses to the correct location on image.
+
 
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers), duplicate responses, show the drag handle when dragging a response and add transparency to the responses.
+
:3. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response containers''' section. You can adjust the number of answers per field by specifying the number in the ''Maximum responses per container'' field.  
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
[[File:Label_image_with_drag_and_drop_2.png |alt="Setting answer positions for a label image with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 3''']]
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
 
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
:4. Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
[[File:Label_image_with_drag_and_drop_3.png |alt="Answer options (1) for a label image with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by dragging and dropping the responses to the correct location on image.
 +
:6. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers), duplicate responses, show the drag handle when dragging a response and add transparency to the responses.
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drag_and_drop_4.png |alt="Answer options (2) for a label image with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:7. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:8. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drag_and_drop_5.png |alt="More options for a label image with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7-9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:11. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drag_and_drop_6.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a label image with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 272: Line 391:
  
 
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drag_and_drop_7.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 12 & 23''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 278: Line 400:
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
#Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response positions''' section. You can add more responses by click '''ADD''' under '''Response positions'''.  
+
[[File:Label_image_with_drop_down_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a label image with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. For each response, add a number of selectable responses from the drop-down. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by selecting them from the drop-down.  
+
 
#You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers).
+
:4. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response positions''' section. You can add more responses by click '''ADD''' under '''Response positions'''. You can also toggle the option to ''Edit ARIA labels'' in the same section.  
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
[[File:Label_image_with_drop_down_2.png |alt="Response positions for a label image with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
 
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, change the ''Image scale'', adjust ''Font size'' and customize the ''Pointer'' location.  
+
:5. Create the appropriate responses under the ''Possible responses'' section. For each response, add a number of selectable responses from the drop-down. To add more responses, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last option.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
[[File:Label_image_with_drop_down_3.png |alt="Answer options (1) for a label image with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section,, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by selecting them from the drop-down.  
 +
:7. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' (randomize order of answers).
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drop_down_4.png |alt="Answer options (2) for a label image with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6 & 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:8. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:9. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:10. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drop_down_5.png |alt="More options for a label image with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8-10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:11. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, change the ''Image scale'', adjust ''Font size'' and customize the ''Pointer'' location.  
 +
:12. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drop_down_6.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a label image with drop-down question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 293: Line 432:
  
 
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_drop_down_7.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 13 & 14''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 299: Line 441:
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
#Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response positions''' section. You can add more responses by click '''ADD''' under '''Response positions'''.  
+
[[File:Label_image_with_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a label image with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by inserting them in the appropriate field.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle if the answers are ''Case sensitive'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response positions''' section. You can add more responses by clicking '''ADD''' under '''Response positions'''. You also toggle to ''Edit ARIA labels''.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
[[File:Label_image_with_text_2.png |alt="Response positions for a label image with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, change the ''Image scale'', adjust ''Font size'' and customize the ''Pointer'' location.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:5. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by inserting them in the appropriate field.  
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_text_3.png |alt="Answer options for a label image with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle if the answers are ''Case sensitive'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_text_4.png |alt="More options for a label image with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, change the ''Image scale'', adjust ''Font size'' and customize the ''Pointer'' location.  
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_text_5.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a label image with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 312: Line 468:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Label_image_with_text_6.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 317: Line 476:
 
===Classification===
 
===Classification===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
#Specify the '''Column count''' and '''Row count''' (number of rows/columns) by inserting an appropriate integers in the two boxes.  
+
#Specify the '''Column count''' and '''Row count''' (number of rows/columns) by inserting the appropriate integers in the two boxes.  
 
#Specify the column and row titles under '''Column titles''' and '''Row titles''', respectively. To add additional columns/rows, click the the '''ADD''' button under the appropriate section.  
 
#Specify the column and row titles under '''Column titles''' and '''Row titles''', respectively. To add additional columns/rows, click the the '''ADD''' button under the appropriate section.  
#Specify all possible answers under the '''Possible responses section'''. To add more responses, click the '''ADD''' button under the last response.  
+
[[File:Classification_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a classification question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by dragging and dropping them into the row/column.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling '''Show drag handle''',, '''shuffle options''' to randomize the order of the given responses, and '''Duplicate responses''' if a response is applicable to more than one cell.  
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle if the answers are ''Case sensitive'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
:4. Specify all possible answers under the '''Possible responses''' section. To add more responses, click the '''ADD''' button under the last response.
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per cell''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
[[File:Classification_2.png |alt="Answer options (1) for a classification question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Layout''' you can customize the ''Response container position'', ''Row titles width'', ''Row min height'', the ''Row header'', specify the ''Maximum responses per cell'', and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:5. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by dragging and dropping them into the row/column.  
 +
:6. You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling ''Show drag handle'',, ''Shuffle options'' to randomize the order of the given responses, and ''Duplicate responses'' if a response is applicable to more than one cell.  
 +
[[File:Classification_3.png |alt="Answer options (2) for a classification question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:7. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:8. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per cell''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Classification_4.png |alt="More options for a classification question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7-9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under '''Layout''' you can customize the ''Response container position'', ''Row titles width'', ''Row min height'', the ''Row header'', specify the ''Maximum responses per cell'', and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:11. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Classification_5.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a classification question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 332: Line 505:
 
:12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 
:12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
  
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Classification_6.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 12 & 13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 339: Line 515:
 
#Specify the first columns of the question by filling in the responses under '''Stimulus list'''.  
 
#Specify the first columns of the question by filling in the responses under '''Stimulus list'''.  
 
#Specify all possible answers under the '''Possible responses section'''. To add more responses, click the '''ADD''' button under the last response.  
 
#Specify all possible answers under the '''Possible responses section'''. To add more responses, click the '''ADD''' button under the last response.  
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by dragging and dropping them into the appropriate position.  
+
[[File:Match_List_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a match list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling '''Show drag handle''', '''shuffle options''' to randomize the order of the given responses, and '''Duplicate responses''' if a response is applicable to more than one position.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle if the answers are ''Case sensitive'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by dragging and dropping them into the appropriate position.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling ''Show drag handle'', ''Shuffle options'' to randomize the order of the given responses, and ''Duplicate responses'' if a response is applicable to more than one position.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can customize the ''Response container position'' and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
[[File:Match_List_2.png |alt="Answer options for a match list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Match_List_3.png |alt="More options for a match list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can customize the ''Response container position'' and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Match_List_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a match list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 352: Line 539:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Match_List_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 357: Line 547:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#Construct a list of items to be sorted by adding them under the '''List''' section. To add more items to the list, click the '''ADD''' button under the last item.  
 
#Construct a list of items to be sorted by adding them under the '''List''' section. To add more items to the list, click the '''ADD''' button under the last item.  
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by dragging and dropping them in the appropriate order.  
+
[[File:Order_list_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for an order list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling '''Show drag handle''', and toggle '''shuffle options''' to randomize the order of the given responses.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle if the answers are ''Case sensitive'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by dragging and dropping them in the appropriate order.  
#Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to '''Exact match''' if you students to get marks only if all their responses are sorted appropriately.  
+
:4. You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling ''Show drag handle'', and toggle ''Shuffle options'' to randomize the order of the given responses.
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
[[File:Order_list_2.png |alt="Answer options for an order list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can customize the ''List style'', and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:6. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:7. Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to '''Exact match''' if you want students to get marks only if all their responses are sorted appropriately.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Order_list_3.png |alt="More options for an order list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can customize the ''List style'', and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Order_list_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for an order list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
:12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
+
:11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Order_list_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Sort List===
 
===Sort List===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
#Construct a list of items to be sorted by adding them under the '''List''' section. To add more items to the list, click the '''ADD''' button under the last item.  
+
#Construct a list of items to be sorted by adding them under the '''List''' section. To add more items to the list, click the blue '''ADD''' button under the last item.  
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by dragging and dropping them in the appropriate order.  
+
[[File:Sort_list_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a sort list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#You can choose to '''shuffle options''' to randomize the order of the given responses.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle if the answers are ''Case sensitive'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by dragging and dropping them in the appropriate order.  
#Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to '''Exact match''' if you students to get marks only if all their responses are sorted appropriately.  
+
:4. You can choose to ''Shuffle options'' to randomize the order of the given responses.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
[[File:Sort_list_2.png |alt="Answer options for a sort list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling '''Show drag handle''', and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:6. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:7. Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to '''Exact match''' if you want students to get marks only if all their responses are sorted appropriately.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Sort_list_3.png |alt="More options for a sort list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling '''Show drag handle''', and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:10. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Sort_list_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a sort list question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 390: Line 605:
  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Sort_list_5.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 395: Line 613:
 
===Essay with Rich Text===
 
===Essay with Rich Text===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Under '''Text formatting options''', you select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.  
+
#Under '''Text formatting options''', you can select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.  
 
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the '''Show word count''' button.   
 
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the '''Show word count''' button.   
#Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.  
+
[[File:Essay_with_rich_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a written and recorded question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', ''Disable auto link'' and adjust ''Font size''.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
+
  
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
+
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.
 +
[[File:Essay_with_rich_text_2.png |alt="More options for a written and recorded question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', ''Disable auto link'' and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:6. Under '''Details''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
 +
[[File:Essay_with_rich_text_3.png |alt="Layout and details options for a written and recorded question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Details''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
 
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
Line 410: Line 638:
 
#You can toggle the formatting options that can be checked – Copy, Cut and Paste.
 
#You can toggle the formatting options that can be checked – Copy, Cut and Paste.
 
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down.
 
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down.
#Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.  
+
[[File:Essay_with_plain_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for an essay with plain text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters'', change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.  
 +
[[File:Essay_with_plain_text_2.png |alt="More options for an essay with plain text  question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters'', change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:6. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Essay_with_plain_text_3.png |alt="Layout and extra options for an essay with plain text  question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
 
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
 
===Short Text===
 
===Short Text===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
#Under the '''Set the correct answer(s)''' section, set the correct answers by either setting '''Allow''' to '''Any text containing''' or '''Exact match''' from the drop-down and type the keyword in the '''Value box'''. To add alternate answers to the question (i.e., multiple keywords) click the '''+''' icon to the right of the ''correct'' cell.   
+
#Under the '''Set the correct answer(s)''' section, set the correct answers by either setting '''Allow''' to '''Any text containing''' or '''Exact match''' from the drop-down and type the keyword in the '''Value''' textbox. To add alternate answers to the question (i.e., multiple keywords) click the '''+''' icon to the right of the ''correct'' cell.   
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as set a ''Character limit''.   
+
[[File:Short_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a short text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle the feature to accept ''Special characters'', set the question ''Input type'' to either text or number, , set a ''Placeholder, adjust ''Font size''. and whether or not you would like to toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction''.  
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.  
+
:3. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as set a ''Character limit''.   
 +
:4. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Short_text_2.png |alt="More options for a short text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle the feature to accept ''Special characters'', set the question ''Input type'' to either text or number, , set a ''Placeholder, adjust ''Font size''. and whether or not you would like to toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction''.  
 +
:6. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Short_text_3.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a short text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 432: Line 678:
  
 
:8. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:8. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7 & 8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Audio Recorder===
 
===Audio Recorder===
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
+
:1. In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
#You can change the '''Player type''', and set the '''Maximum length (seconds)''' allowed for the recording.  
+
:2. You can change the '''Player type''', and set the '''Maximum length (seconds)''' allowed for the recording.  
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the ''Max score (required)'', set a ''minimum score if attempted'', set the ''Silence stop duration'', toggle whether or not you would like to prompt students with an ''Overwrite warning'' when trying to re-record, and associate a rubric with the recording by clicking ''Manage rubrics'' to add a previously created rubric or to create a new one.  
+
[[File:Audio_recorder_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for an audio recorder question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under '''UI settings''', you can toggle a variety of options for ''Recording'', ''Playback'' and ''Layout'' of the question, as well as adjust ''Font size''.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:3. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the ''Max score (required)'', set a ''minimum score if attempted'', set the ''Silence stop duration'', toggle whether or not you would like to prompt students with an ''Overwrite warning'' when trying to re-record, and associate a rubric with the recording by clicking ''Manage rubrics'' to add a previously created rubric or to create a new one.  
 +
[[File:Audio_recorder_2.png |alt="More options for an audio recorder  question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 3''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:4. Under '''UI settings''', you can toggle a variety of options for ''Recording'', ''Playback'' and ''Layout'' of the question, as well as adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:5. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Audio_recorder_3.png |alt="UI settings and extra options for an audio recorder question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.  
:5. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:6. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
 
===Video Recorder===
 
===Video Recorder===
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
+
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question and provide a link to a recording or use the embed feature in the text editor to insert a video. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#Set the '''Maximum length (seconds)''' allowed for the video recording, and toggle whether or not you would like to prompt students with an ''Overwrite warning'' when trying to re-record
 
#Set the '''Maximum length (seconds)''' allowed for the video recording, and toggle whether or not you would like to prompt students with an ''Overwrite warning'' when trying to re-record
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the ''Max score (required)'', set a ''minimum score if attempted'', and associate a rubric with the recording by clicking ''Manage rubrics'' to add a previously created rubric or to create a new one.
+
[[File:Video_recorder_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a video recorder question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under '''Layout''', you can adjust ''Font size''.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Details''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
+
  
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.  
+
:3. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the ''Max score (required)'', set a ''minimum score if attempted'', and associate a rubric with the recording by clicking ''Manage rubrics'' to add a previously created rubric or to create a new one.
 +
:4. Under '''Layout''', you can adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:5. Under '''Details''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
 +
[[File:Video_recorder_2.png |alt="More options and details options for a video recorder question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Details''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.  
 
:6. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:6. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
Line 459: Line 725:
 
===Highlight Image===
 
===Highlight Image===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click ''Edit'' to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
+
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click ''Edit'' to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions and add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
+
 
#You can choose to change/add additional line color options under the ''Line color options'' menu.   
 
#You can choose to change/add additional line color options under the ''Line color options'' menu.   
#Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button to create a new rubric or use a saved one.  
+
[[File:Highlight_image_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a highlight image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the ''Line width'', and adjust ''Font size''  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button to create a new rubric or use a saved one.  
 +
:5. Under '''Layout''' you can change the ''Line width'', and adjust ''Font size''  
 +
:6. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Highlight_image_2.png |alt="More options, layout and extra for a highlight image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4-6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
:8. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
Line 474: Line 746:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#You can toggle a variety of tools and formatting options under the ''Toggle toolbar options'' and ''Text formatting options'' menus, respectively.  
 
#You can toggle a variety of tools and formatting options under the ''Toggle toolbar options'' and ''Text formatting options'' menus, respectively.  
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click ''Edit'' to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
+
[[File:Drawing_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a drawing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#You can choose to change/add additional line color options under the ''Drawing line and text color'' menu.   
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button to create a new rubric or use a saved one.  
+
:3. In the '''Image preview''' section, click ''Edit'' to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the ''Line width'', toggle special characters, and adjust ''Font size''  
+
:4. You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and change the ''Width'' of the image, if desired.  
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:5. You can choose to change/add additional line color options under the ''Drawing line and text color'' menu.   
 +
[[File:Drawing_2.png |alt="Image preview options for a drawing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button to create a new rubric or use a saved one.  
 +
:7. Under '''Layout''' you can change the ''Line width'', toggle special characters, and adjust ''Font size''  
 +
:8. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Drawing_3.png |alt="More options, layout and extra options for a drawing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
 
:9. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:9. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
 
===Shading===
 
===Shading===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
#Under the '''Canvas options''' menu you can set the ''Row count, Column count, Cell width'' and ''Cell height''
+
#Under the '''Canvas options''' menu you can set the ''Row count, Column count, Cell width'' and ''Cell height''.
#Under the '''Shade cells''' menu you can shade specific cells to change how the diagram is presented to students. You can also choose to ''Lock shaded cells'', add a ''Shading image'', add ''Image alternative text'', and assign an ''Image title''.  
+
[[File:Shading_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a shading question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Set the correct answer by under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section by shading the correct response. You can change the scoring method to either by ''byLocation'', or ''byCount''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For the ''Scoring type'', set it to ''Exact match'' or ''Partial match'' depending on the circumstance and don't forget to ''Enable auto scoring''.
+
:3. Under the '''Shade cells''' menu you can shade specific cells to change how the diagram is presented to students. You can also choose to ''Lock shaded cells'', add a ''Shading image'', add ''Image alternative text'', and assign an ''Image title''.
#Under the same menu, you can set a ''Minimum score if attempted'',  if desired.  
+
[[File:Shading_2.png |alt="Shade cell options for a shading question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 3''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the ''Hide cells'', change the ''Border type'' set the ''Maximum number of responses'', enable ''Hover state'', and adjust ''Font size''.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Background image''' section, you can choose to upload an image from your local computer or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host.  
+
#In the same menu, you can add ''Image alternative text'', assign an ''Image title'' and modify the display properties and dimensions of the image.  
+
:4. Set the correct answer by under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section by shading the correct response. You can change the scoring method to either by ''byLocation'', or ''byCount''.  
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
[[File:Shading_3.png |alt="Answer options for a shading question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:6. For the ''Scoring type'', set it to ''Exact match'' or ''Partial match'' depending on the circumstance and don't forget to ''Enable auto scoring''.
 +
:7. Under the same menu, you can set a ''Minimum score if attempted'',  if desired.  
 +
[[File:Shading_4.png |alt="More options for a shading question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:8. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can toggle ''Hide cells'', change the ''Border type'' set the ''Maximum number of responses'', enable ''Hover state'', and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Shading_5.png |alt="Layout and selection options for a shading question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under the '''Background image''' section, you can choose to upload an image from your local computer or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host.  
 +
:10. In the same menu, you can add ''Image alternative text'', assign an ''Image title'' and modify the display properties and dimensions of the image.  
 +
:11. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Shading_6.png |thumb|alt="Background image and extra options for a shading question"|left|550px|'''Steps 9-11''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 504: Line 803:
  
 
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 12 & 13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 509: Line 811:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#Under the '''Template''' section, you can edit the template (question content) by clicking on ''Edit Template'' and toggle the highlightable'' Sentence/Paragraph/Word'' by clicking the ''Edit Token'' button.  
 
#Under the '''Template''' section, you can edit the template (question content) by clicking on ''Edit Template'' and toggle the highlightable'' Sentence/Paragraph/Word'' by clicking the ''Edit Token'' button.  
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by highlighting them.   
+
[[File:Token_highlight_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a token highlight question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'' ('''recommended''', to avoid students from highlighting all options), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
 
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section,, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by highlighting them.   
#Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can adjust ''Font size'' and specify the ''Maximum number of responses''.  
+
[[File:Token_highlight_2.png |alt="Answer options for a token highlight question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 3''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'' ('''recommended''', to avoid students from highlighting all options), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:5. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:6. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Token_highlight_3.png |alt="More options for a token highlight question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4-6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:7. Under '''Layout and Selection''' you can adjust ''Font size'' (currently does not work) and specify the ''Maximum number of responses''.  
 +
:8. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Token_highlight_4.png |alt="Layout and selection and extra options for a token highlight question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7 & 8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 521: Line 834:
  
 
:10. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:10. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 527: Line 843:
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' and modify the image dimensions.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' and modify the image dimensions.  
#Under the '''Areas''' section, draw the regions you would like students to be able to highlight in their responses.  
+
[[File:Hotspot_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a hotspot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under '''Attributes''' you can change the ''Fill color'' and ''Outline color''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by selecting the appropriate region(s) of the image. You can also toggle ''Multiple responses'' under the image if applicable.  
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'' ('''recommended''', to avoid students from highlighting all options), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
:4. Under the '''Areas''' section, draw the regions you would like students to be able to highlight in their responses.  
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:5. Under '''Attributes''' you can change the ''Fill color'' and ''Outline color''.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
[[File:Hotspot_2.png |alt="Areas and attributes options for a hotspot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, and adjust ''Font size''.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:6. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by selecting the appropriate region(s) of the image. You can also toggle ''Multiple responses'' under the image if applicable.  
 +
[[File:Hotspot_3.png |alt="Answer options for a hotspot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:7. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'' ('''recommended''', to avoid students from highlighting all options), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:8. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Hotspot_4.png |alt="More options for a hotspot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7-9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:11. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Hotspot_5.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a hotspot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 541: Line 871:
  
 
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 12 & 13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 546: Line 878:
 
===Math Formula===
 
===Math Formula===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Template''' field.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivValue'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number for the response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
+
[[File:Math_formula_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a math formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Ignore text'' provided in the response field.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivValue'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number for the response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
#For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Ignore text'' provided in the response field.
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
#Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Math_formula_2.png |alt="Answer options for a math formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:7. For scoring type, keep it as '''Exact match''', as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Math_formula_3.png |alt="More options for a math formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Math_formula_4.png |alt="Layout options for a math formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:12. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
 +
 
 +
:13. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Math_formula_5.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 563: Line 910:
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
  
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Math with Fractions===
 
===Math with Fractions===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Template''' field.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivliteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
+
[[File:Math_with_fractions_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a math with fractions question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivliteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
#For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
#Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Math_with_fractions_2.png |alt="Answer options for a math with fractions question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Math_formula_3.png |alt="More options for a math with fractions question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Math_formula_4.png |alt="Layout options for a math with fractions question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:12. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
:13. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Math_with_fractions_3.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math with fractions question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 586: Line 949:
  
 
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Math - Fill in the Blanks===
 
===Math - Fill in the Blanks===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Template''' field.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer.  You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
+
[[File:Math_fill_in_the_blanks_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a math - fill in the blanks question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer.  You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
#For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
#Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Math_fill_in_the_blanks_2.png |alt="Answer options for a math - fill in the blanks question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:7. For scoring type, keep it as '''Exact match''', as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Math_fill_in_the_blanks_3.png |alt="More options for a math - fill in the blanks question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under the '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Math_formula_4.png |alt="Layout options for a math - fill in the blanks question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:12. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
:13. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Math_with_fractions_3.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math - fill in the blanks question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 607: Line 987:
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
  
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Math with Text===
 
===Math with Text===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Template''' field.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer.  You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
+
[[File:Math_with_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a math with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'' ('''recommended'''), and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer.  You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
#For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'' ('''recommended'''), and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
#Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Math_with_text_2.png |alt="Answer options for a math with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Math_fill_in_the_blanks_3.png |alt="More options for a math with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''', you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Math_formula_4.png |alt="Layout options for a math with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:12. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
:13. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Math_with_fractions_3.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math with text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 629: Line 1,025:
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
  
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Math with Matrices===
 
===Math with Matrices===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Template''' field.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer.  You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
+
[[File:Math_with_matrices_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a math with matrices question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer.  You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
#For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
#Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Math_with_matrices_2.png |alt="Answer options for a math with matrices  question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Math_fill_in_the_blanks_3.png |alt="More options for a math with matrices question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under the '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Math_formula_4.png |alt="Layout options for a math with matrices question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:12. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
:13. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Math_with_matrices_3.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math with matrices question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 651: Line 1,063:
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
  
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Math with Units===
 
===Math with Units===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field. Don't forget to provide units in the template field!
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Template''' field. Don't forget to provide units in the template field!
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer (make sure to include units). You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
+
[[File:Math_with_units_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a math with units question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for the response(s) ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring ''Method''), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the ''Value'' field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the ''Template'' field, but this time, replacing the ''response'' field with the correct answer (make sure to include units). You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
#For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
#Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Math_with_units_2.png |alt="Answer options for a math with units question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Math_fill_in_the_blanks_3.png |alt="More options for a math with units question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Math_formula_4.png |alt="Layout options for a math with units question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:12. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
[[File:Math_with_units_3.png |alt="Keypad and symbols options for a math with units question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:13. Under '''Text blocks''', you can specify the units for all text blocks.
 +
:14. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Math_with_units_4.png |alt="Text blocks and extra options for a math with units question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 13 & 14''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
:14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
+
:15. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 +
 
 +
:16. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 15 & 16''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 680: Line 1,115:
 
#Under '''Text formatting options''', you select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.  
 
#Under '''Text formatting options''', you select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.  
 
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the '''Show word count''' button.   
 
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the '''Show word count''' button.   
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change all keys on the keypad under the ''Number pad'' section. You can also enable ''Show keypad hints'' and ''Enable horizontal keypad''.
+
[[File:Math_essay_with_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a math essay with rich text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT:''' Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in keypad functions.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.
+
#Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', ''Disable auto link'' and adjust ''Font size''.
+
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
+
  
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
+
:4. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change all keys on the keypad under the ''Number pad'' section. You can also enable ''Show keypad hints'' and ''Enable horizontal keypad''.
 +
:5. Under the same menu, navigate to ''Symbols'' to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT:''' Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in keypad functions.
 +
[[File:Math_essay_with_text_2.png |alt="Keypad, and symbols options for a math essay with rich text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.
 +
:7. Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', ''Disable auto link'' and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:8. Under '''Details''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
 +
[[File:Math_essay_with_text_3.png |alt="More options, layout and details options for a math essay with rich text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Details''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
 
:9. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:9. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
 
===Cloze Math===
 
===Cloze Math===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for all responses ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression as a response), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly. Make sure to only include the correct answer in the ''Value'' field and to also toggle ''Ignore order''.  
+
[[File:Cloze_math_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a cloze math question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
+
 
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' for all responses ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression as a response), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly. Make sure to only include the correct answer in the ''Value'' field and to also toggle ''Ignore order''.  
#For scoring type, set it to ''Partial match per response'', to ensure students get partial marks for partially correct responses. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:4. Under the same section, you can toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore order'', ''Ignore trailing zeros'', toggle whether or not you would like to ''Allow interval'', ''Inverse result'', and ''Compare grouping'' for the response.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under the ''Allow decimal marks'' toggle.
#Under '''Layout''', you can change the display formatting of the question, adjust ''Font size'', and setup a ''Formula template (global)'' to populate the response fields by arbitrary values/expressions. Entering anything in the ''Formula template (global)'' field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the '''Response containers (individual)''' field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue '''ADD''' button under '''Response Containers (individual)''' to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click '''ADD''' to create an additional one.  
+
[[File:Cloze_math_2.png |alt="Answer options for a cloze math question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field). You can also enable ''Show keypad hints'', ''Enable horizontal keypad'' and toggle ''Place keypad below response area''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:7. For scoring type, set it to ''Partial match per response'', to ensure students get partial marks for partially correct responses. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Cloze_math_3.png |alt="More options for a cloze math question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''', you can change the display formatting of the question, adjust ''Font size'', and setup a ''Formula template (global)'' to populate the response fields by arbitrary values/expressions. Entering anything in the ''Formula template (global)'' field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the '''Response containers (individual)''' field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue '''ADD''' button under '''Response Containers (individual)''' to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click '''ADD''' to create an additional one.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_math_4.png |alt="Layout options for a cloze math question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field). You can also enable ''Show keypad hints'', ''Enable horizontal keypad'' and toggle ''Place keypad below response area''.  
 +
:11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:12. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
:13. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_math_5.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze math question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 711: Line 1,170:
  
 
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 717: Line 1,179:
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
 
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' for the image, and add ''Text on hover'', if desired.  
#Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response positions''' section. You can add more responses by click '''ADD''' under '''Response positions'''.  
+
[[File:Cloze_math_with_image_1.png |alt="Composing question for a cloze math with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the same section, entering anything in the ''Formula template (global)'' field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the '''Response containers (individual)''' field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue '''ADD''' button under '''Response Containers (individual)''' to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click '''ADD''' to create an additional one.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivValue'' for all responses ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number for a response), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly. Make sure to only include the correct answer in the ''Value'' field.  
+
 
#Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore text'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Compare sides'' for the response.
+
:4. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response positions''' section. You can add more responses by click '''ADD''' under '''Response positions'''.  
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
:5. Under the same section, entering anything in the ''Formula template (global)'' field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the '''Response containers (individual)''' field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue '''ADD''' button under '''Response Containers (individual)''' to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click '''ADD''' to create an additional one.
#For scoring type, keep it as ''Exact match'', as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
[[File:Cloze_math_with_image_2.png |alt="Response options for a cloze math with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
 
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
:6. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivValue'' for all responses ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number for a response), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly. Make sure to only include the correct answer in the ''Value'' field.  
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
:7. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of ''Significant decimal places'', toggle the option to ''Allow decimal marks'', toggle ''Ignore text'', and toggle whether or not you would like to ''Compare sides'' for the response.
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
[[File:Cloze_math_with_image_3.png |alt="Answer options for a cloze math with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6 & 7''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:8. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
 +
:9. For scoring type, keep it as '''Exact match''', as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:10. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
:11. Under the '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Cloze_math_with_image_4.png |alt="More options for a cloze math with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8-11''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:12. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:13. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:14. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
:15. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_math_with_image_5.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze math with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 12-15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 735: Line 1,211:
  
 
:17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 16 & 17''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 740: Line 1,219:
 
#For the '''Parameters''' menu, under the '''Create parameters and set their values''' provide the ''Parameter name'', the ''Value type (Range/List)'', set ''Min/Max'' values and the ''Step incrementing factor''. To add additional parameters, click the blue '''Add parameter''' button at the bottom.  
 
#For the '''Parameters''' menu, under the '''Create parameters and set their values''' provide the ''Parameter name'', the ''Value type (Range/List)'', set ''Min/Max'' values and the ''Step incrementing factor''. To add additional parameters, click the blue '''Add parameter''' button at the bottom.  
 
#Once you are done adding/modifying parameters, click '''Next'''.
 
#Once you are done adding/modifying parameters, click '''Next'''.
#In the '''Expression & Question''' menu, under the '''Create the expression with the parameter(s)''' section, create an expression that generates the answer to the question. To add the created parameters into the expression, click the ''Stacked coins'' icon in the top right corner and select the appropriate parameter from the drop-down to insert it into the text box.  
+
[[File:Math_question_generator_1.png |alt="Composing parameters for a math question generator question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#In the same menu, under the '''Compose the question''' section, enter your question text. Be sure to provide the parameters in the question text so that students are able to see the parameters which change in value. To add the parameters, click the ''Parameters'' button in the text editor toolbar and select the appropriate parameter from the drop-down. Be sure to also provide a response box by clicking the ''r'' symbol enclosed in a dotted box in the text editor toolbar.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Once you are done making changes, click '''Next'''.
+
 
#In the '''Answer formats''' menu, under the '''Select the correct answer format(s)''' section, select the accepted formats for this question (''Original expression, Fraction, Decimal value, & Scientific'').
+
:3. In the '''Expression & Question''' menu, under the '''Create the expression with the parameter(s)''' section, create an expression that generates the answer to the question. To add the created parameters into the expression, click the ''Stacked coins'' icon in the top right corner and select the appropriate parameter from the drop-down to insert it into the text box.  
#In the same menu, under the '''More options''' section, set the ''Score(points)'', the type of ''Decimal separator (Dot/Comma)'', the type of ''Thousands operator (Dot, Comma, Space, Space, dot, & Space, comma''), and set the number of ''Decimal places (max of 10)''.
+
:4. In the same menu, under the '''Compose the question''' section, enter your question text. Be sure to provide the parameters in the question text so that students are able to see the parameters which change in value. To add the parameters, click the ''Parameters'' button in the text editor toolbar and select the appropriate parameter from the drop-down. Be sure to also provide a response box by clicking the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol.  
#Once you are done making changes, click '''Next'''.
+
:5. Once you are done making changes, click '''Next'''.
#In the '''Generate''' menu, a total of 50 different variations will be generated based on the parameter settings set in the '''Parameters''' menu. To generate new variations of the parameters, click the blue '''Regenerate''' button. To delete unwanted variations, select the variation by checking the box to the left of the variation and clicking the '''Remove''' button at the top of the page.  
+
[[File:Math_question_generator_2.png |alt="Composing question and answer options for a math question generator question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#Once you are done making changes, click '''Apply''' to save the variations and move on to the final menu.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display dimensions of the response box and provide an ''ARIA label''.  
+
 
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
:6. In the '''Answer formats''' menu, under the '''Select the correct answer format(s)''' section, select the accepted formats for this question (''Original expression, Fraction, Decimal value, & Scientific'').
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section. You can also enable ''Show keypad hints'' and ''Enable horizontal keypad''.   
+
:7. In the same menu, under the '''More options''' section, set the ''Score(points)'', the type of ''Decimal separator (Dot/Comma)'', the type of ''Thousands operator (Dot, Comma, Space, Space, dot, & Space, comma''), and set the number of ''Decimal places (max of 10)''.
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
+
:8. Once you are done making changes, click '''Next'''.
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
+
[[File:Math_question_generator_3.png |alt="Answer format options for a math question generator question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-5''']]
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:9. In the '''Generate''' menu, a total of 50 different variations will be generated based on the parameter settings set in the '''Parameters''' menu. To generate new variations of the parameters, click the blue '''Regenerate''' button. To delete unwanted variations, select the variation by checking the box to the left of the variation and clicking the '''Remove''' button at the top of the page.  
 +
:10. Once you are done making changes, click '''Apply''' to save the variations and move on to the final menu.
 +
[[File:Math_question_generator_4.png |alt="Generated question options for a math question generator question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:11. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display dimensions of the response box and provide an ''ARIA label''.  
 +
:12. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:13. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section. You can also enable ''Show keypad hints'' and ''Enable horizontal keypad''.   
 +
:14. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the appropriate group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.  
 +
[[File:Math_question_generator_5.png |alt="Layout, keypad, and symbols options for a math question generator question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11-14''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:15. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
 +
:16. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
:17. Under the '''Layout''' section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:18. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Math_question_generator_6.png |alt="More options, layout and extra options for a math question generator question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 15-18''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 762: Line 1,258:
  
 
:20. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:20. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 19 & 20''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 770: Line 1,268:
 
#Under '''Tools''' you can add individual tools for students to use when attempting the question, by clicking the '''ADD''' button or you can click the '''ADD GROUP''' button to add a variety of tools in a single drop-down.
 
#Under '''Tools''' you can add individual tools for students to use when attempting the question, by clicking the '''ADD''' button or you can click the '''ADD GROUP''' button to add a variety of tools in a single drop-down.
 
#After adding the appropriate number of buttons, customize the buttons by clicking the drop-down under the appropriate ''button/group''.
 
#After adding the appropriate number of buttons, customize the buttons by clicking the drop-down under the appropriate ''button/group''.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct shape using the graphing tools.  
+
[[File:Graphing_1.png |alt="Composing question, graph parameters and tools for a graphing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-4''']]
#In the same menu, set ''Ignore repeated shapes'' to no or any of the other options if desired. For more info on this option, please refer to the following BetterExaminations help [https://docs.betterexaminations.com/articles/better-examinations-online/academic-staff/creating-questions/using-the-repeated-shapes-option-in-graphing/ page].
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded.
+
 
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct shape using the graphing tools.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
:6. In the same menu, set ''Ignore repeated shapes'' to no or any of the other options if desired. For more info on this option, please refer to the following BetterExaminations help [https://docs.betterexaminations.com/articles/better-examinations-online/academic-staff/creating-questions/using-the-repeated-shapes-option-in-graphing/ page].
#Under the '''Grid''' section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing the number under the ''X/Y distance'' text.  
+
[[File:Graphing_2.png |alt="Answer options for a graphing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
#In the same section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the number under the ''Tick distance'' text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Controls''' section, you can add/remove different edit options (''Undo, Redo, Delete, Reset'').  
+
 
#Under the '''Annotation''' section, you can label the different axes as well as assign a title to the plot.  
+
:7.Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded.
#You can choose to attach and customize a background image under the '''Background image''' section.  
+
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Graphing_3.png |alt="More options for a graphing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7-9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Grid''' section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing the number under the ''X/Y distance'' text.  
 +
:11. In the same section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the number under the ''Tick distance'' text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.  
 +
:12. Under the '''Controls''' section, you can add/remove different edit options (''Undo, Redo, Delete, Reset'').  
 +
:13. Under the '''Annotation''' section, you can label the different axes as well as assign a title to the plot.  
 +
[[File:Graphing_4.png |alt="Grid, controls, and annotation options for a graphing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:14. You can choose to attach and customize a background image under the '''Background image''' section.  
 +
:15. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Graphing_5.png |alt="Extra options for a graphing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 787: Line 1,299:
  
 
:17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 16 & 17''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 795: Line 1,309:
 
#Under '''Tools''' you can add individual tools for students to use when attempting the question, by clicking the '''ADD''' button or you can click the '''ADD GROUP''' button to add a variety of tools in a single drop-down.
 
#Under '''Tools''' you can add individual tools for students to use when attempting the question, by clicking the '''ADD''' button or you can click the '''ADD GROUP''' button to add a variety of tools in a single drop-down.
 
#After adding the appropriate number of buttons, customize the buttons by clicking the drop-down under the appropriate ''button/group''.
 
#After adding the appropriate number of buttons, customize the buttons by clicking the drop-down under the appropriate ''button/group''.
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct shape using the graphing tools.  
+
[[File:Graphing_in_1st_quadrant_1.png |alt="Composing question, graph parameters and tools for a graphing question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-4''']]
#In the same menu, set ''Ignore repeated shapes'' to no or any of the other options if desired. For more info on this option, please refer to the following BetterExaminations help [https://docs.betterexaminations.com/articles/better-examinations-online/academic-staff/creating-questions/using-the-repeated-shapes-option-in-graphing/ page].
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded
+
 
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct shape using the graphing tools.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
:6. In the same menu, set ''Ignore repeated shapes'' to no or any of the other options if desired. For more info on this option, please refer to the following BetterExaminations help [https://docs.betterexaminations.com/articles/better-examinations-online/academic-staff/creating-questions/using-the-repeated-shapes-option-in-graphing/ page].
#Under the '''Grid''' section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing the number under the ''X/Y distance'' text.  
+
[[File:Graphing_in_1st_quadrant_2.png |alt="Answer options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
#In the same section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the number under the ''Tick distance'' text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Controls''' section, you can add/remove different edit options (''Undo, Redo, Delete, Reset'').  
+
 
#Under the '''Annotation''' section, you can label the different axes as well as assign a title to the plot.  
+
:7. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded
#You can choose to attach and customize a background image under the '''Background image''' section.  
+
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
[[File:Graphing_3.png |alt="More options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7-9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Grid''' section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing the number under the ''X/Y distance'' text.  
 +
:11. In the same section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the number under the ''Tick distance'' text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.  
 +
:12. Under the '''Controls''' section, you can add/remove different edit options (''Undo, Redo, Delete, Reset'').  
 +
:13. Under the '''Annotation''' section, you can label the different axes as well as assign a title to the plot.  
 +
[[File:Graphing_4.png |alt="Grid, controls and annotation options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10-13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:14. You can choose to attach and customize a background image under the '''Background image''' section.  
 +
:15. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Graphing_5.png |alt="Extra options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 14 & 15''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 812: Line 1,340:
  
 
:17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 16 & 17''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 818: Line 1,348:
 
#Under the '''Line''' section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the line graph.   
 
#Under the '''Line''' section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the line graph.   
 
#In the same section, you can assign a ''Title'' to the line graph.
 
#In the same section, you can assign a ''Title'' to the line graph.
#Under the '''Points''' section enter the different points you would like to make selectable for the question.  
+
[[File:Number_line_with_drag_&_drop_1.png |alt="Composing question and line options for a number line with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and drag and drop the points to the correct positions.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
+
:4. Under the '''Points''' section enter the different points you would like to make selectable for the question.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:5. Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and drag and drop the points to the correct positions.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Number_line_with_drag_&_drop_2.png |alt="Points and answer options for a number line with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4 & 5''']]
#Under the '''Ticks''' section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing Tick distance. You can also change the tick format and tick visibility.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Labels''' section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the the number under the ''Frequency'' text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.  
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:6. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:7. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.
 +
:8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).\
 +
[[File:Number_line_with_drag_&_drop_3.png |alt="More options for a number line with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:10. Under the '''Ticks''' section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing Tick distance. You can also change the tick format and tick visibility.  
 +
[[File:Number_line_with_drag_&_drop_4.png |alt="Layout and tick options for a number line with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9 & 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:11. Under the '''Labels''' section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the the number under the ''Frequency'' text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.  
 +
:12. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Number_line_with_drag_&_drop_5.png |alt="Labels and extra options for a number line with drag and drop question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11 & 12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 833: Line 1,377:
  
 
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 13 & 14''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Number Line with Plot===
 
===Number Line with Plot===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
#Under the '''Line''' section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the line graph, assign a title to the number line, and limit the number of lines/points students are allowed to draw on the number line by adjusting the ''Number of responses allowed'' field.
+
#Under the '''Line''' section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the line graph, assign a title to the number line, and limit the number of lines/points students are allowed to draw on the number line by adjusting the ''Number of responses allowed'' field.  
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct points/intervals using the graphing tools.  
+
[[File:Number_line_with_plot_1.png |alt="Composing question and line options for a number line with plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers or change it to ''Exact match'' (depending on the question). Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
 
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s) section''', set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct points/intervals using the graphing tools.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and minimum/maximum interval arrows, and adjust ''Font size''.
+
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
#Under the '''Toolbar''' section, you can choose to add and customize a toolbar, if desired.  
+
:5. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers or change it to '''Exact match''' (depending on the question). Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
#Under the '''Ticks''' section you can change the visibility of the points, customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing ''Minor ticks''.  
+
:6. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
#Under the same section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the the number under the ''Tick distance'' text.  
+
[[File:Number_line_with_plot_2.png |alt="Answer options and more options for a number line with plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3-6''']]
#Under the '''Labels''' section, you can adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu ''(Show labels, Show min, Display specific points, Show max)''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
 
 +
:7. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and minimum/maximum interval arrows, and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:8. Under the '''Toolbar''' section, you can choose to add and customize a toolbar, if desired.  
 +
 
 +
'''Note:''' Customizing the toolbar will remove all default tools from the toolbar.
 +
:9. Under the '''Ticks''' section you can change the visibility of the points, customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing ''Minor ticks''. You can also adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the the number under the ''Tick distance'' text.  
 +
[[File:Number_line_with_plot_3.png |alt="Layout, toolbar, and tick options for a number line with plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7-9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:10. Under the '''Labels''' section, you can adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu ''(Show labels, Show min, Display specific points, Show max)''.  
 +
:11. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Number_line_with_plot_4.png |alt="Labels and extra options for a number line with plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 10 & 11''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
:13. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
+
:12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
 +
 
 +
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 12 & 13''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 861: Line 1,423:
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
#Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the bar chart.  
+
[[File:Bar_chart_1.png |alt="Composing question, chart, and point options for a bar chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.   
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the bar chart.  
 +
[[File:Bar_chart_2.png |alt="Answer options for a bar chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you '''Enable auto scoring''' to ensure the question is automatically graded
 +
[[File:Bar_chart_3.png |alt="More options for a bar chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'', which currently does not work with this question type) , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.   
 +
:7. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Bar_chart_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a bar chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6 & 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 871: Line 1,444:
  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 877: Line 1,452:
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
#Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the line chart.  
+
[[File:Line_chart_1.png |alt="Composing question, chart, and point options for a line chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.   
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the line chart.  
 +
[[File:Line_chart_2.png |alt="Answer options for a line chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you '''Enable auto scoring''' to ensure the question is automatically graded
 +
[[File:Line_chart_3.png |alt="More options for a line chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.   
 +
:7. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Line_chart_4.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a line chart question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6 & 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 887: Line 1,473:
  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 893: Line 1,481:
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
#Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the bars.  
+
[[File:Histogram_1.png |alt="Composing question, chart, and point options for a histogram question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.  Make sure to toggle ''Multicolor bars'' so students will be able to differentiate between the different bars, as in a histogram, there is no space between the various bars.  
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the bars.  
 +
[[File:Histogram_2.png |alt="Answer options for a histogram question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you '''Enable auto scoring''' to ensure the question is automatically graded
 +
[[File:Line_chart_3.png |alt="More options for a histogram question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.  Make sure to toggle ''Multicolor bars'' so students will be able to differentiate between the different bars, as in a histogram, there is no space between the various bars.  
 +
:7. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Histogram_3.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a histogram question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6 & 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 903: Line 1,502:
  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 909: Line 1,511:
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
#Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the dot plot.  
+
[[File:Dot_plot_1.png |alt="Composing question, chart, and point options for a dot plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the dot plot.
 +
[[File:Dot_plot_2.png |alt="Answer options for a dot plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you '''Enable auto scoring''' to ensure the question is automatically graded.
 +
[[File:Line_chart_3.png |alt="More options for a dot plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:7. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
 +
[[File:Dot_plot_3.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a dot plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6 & 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 919: Line 1,532:
  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 925: Line 1,541:
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under the '''Chart''' section, you can assign a ''Name'' to the chart, set a ''X axis label'', ''Y axis label'' as well as set a ''Max Y value''.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
 
#Under each '''Point #''' section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a ''Label'', set a default initial ''Value'' and make sure you check ''Interactive'' to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the '''ADD''' button.  
#Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the line plot.  
+
[[File:Line_plot_1.png |alt="Composing question, chart, and point options for a line plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you ''Enable auto scoring'' to ensure the question is automatically graded
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:4. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the line plot.  
 +
[[File:Line_plot_2.png |alt="Answer options for a line plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you '''Enable auto scoring''' to ensure the question is automatically graded.
 +
[[File:Line_chart_3.png |alt="More options for a line plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:6. Under the '''Layout''' section you can change the ''Chart type'' (''Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart''), adjust formatting options (option to ''Convert slashes to stacked fractions'', toggle the ability for students to ''Add points'', allow students to ''Edit point label'' for each individual point, and toggle ''Multicolor bars'') , set point options (''Resize point, Delete point, Order point'') and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
:7. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Line_plot_3.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a line plot question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 6 & 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 935: Line 1,562:
  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 941: Line 1,571:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.  
 
#Setup the response template field by inserting the '''r''' in the '''Template''' field.  
 
#Setup the response template field by inserting the '''r''' in the '''Template''' field.  
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'', and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.  
+
[[File:Chemistry_formula_1.png |alt="Composing question for a chemistry formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same menu there is an option to ''Ignore order'' and ''Inverse result''. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under ''Inverse result''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as toggle whether or not the answers are case sensitive by toggling ''Case sensitive''.  
+
 
#For scoring type, set it to '''Exact match''' so that only fully correct answers are assigned a grade. Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'', and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.  
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:4. Under the same menu there is an option to ''Ignore order'' and ''Inverse result''. To add additional scoring methods, click the '''ADD''' button under ''Inverse result''.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
[[File:Chemistry_formula_2.png |alt="Answer options for a chemistry formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
 
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.  
+
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:6. For scoring type, set it to '''Exact match''' so that only fully correct answers are assigned a grade. Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
:8. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
[[File:Chemistry_formula_3.png |alt="More options for a chemistry formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:10. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:11. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.  
 +
:12. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Chemistry_formula_4.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a chemistry formula question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9-12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 957: Line 1,598:
  
 
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 13 & 14''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
 
===Cloze Chemistry===
 
===Cloze Chemistry===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.  
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the '''r''' symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.  
+
#Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the [[File:R_symbol.PNG| 20px|r symbol|alt="letter r enclosed in dotted box"]] symbol to insert response fields in the '''Formula template''' field.  
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivValue'' for all responses ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to balance a chemical equation), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
+
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a cloze chemistry question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as toggle whether or not the answers are case sensitive by toggling ''Case sensitive''.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
 
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
:3. Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to ''equivValue'' for all responses ('''IMPORTANT''': Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to balance a chemical equation), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle ''Edit ARIA label'' to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.  
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, adjust ''Font size'', and setup a ''Formula template (global)'' to populate the response fields by arbitrary values. Entering anything in the ''Formula template (global)'' field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the '''Response containers (individual)''' field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue '''ADD''' button under '''Response Containers (individual)''' to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click '''ADD''' to create an additional one.  
+
:4. You can also change the maximum allowed amount of ''Significant decimal places'' in the same section as well as add additional scoring methods, by clicking the blue '''ADD''' button at the bottom. 
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_2.png |alt="Answer options for a cloze chemistry question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.  
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:5. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers.
 +
:6. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_3.png |alt="More options for a cloze chemistry question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5-7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:8. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, adjust ''Font size'', and setup a ''Formula template (global)'' to populate the response fields by arbitrary values. Entering anything in the ''Formula template (global)'' field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the '''Response containers (individual)''' field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue '''ADD''' button under '''Response Containers (individual)''' to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click '''ADD''' to create an additional one.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_4.png |alt="Layout options for a cloze chemistry question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:9. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:10. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:11. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.  
 +
:12. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Chemistry_formula_4.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze chemistry question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 9-12''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
:12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
+
:13. Once you are done editing the question options, click the '''Preview''' button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the '''Show Answers''' button to view the correct answer.  
  
:13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 13 & 14''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 982: Line 1,643:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#Under '''Text formatting options''', you select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.  
 
#Under '''Text formatting options''', you select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.  
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the '''Show word count''' button.   
+
#Under the same menu, you can also set a '''Word limit''' on responses, select the '''Word limit''' visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the '''Show word count''' button.  
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
[[File:Chemistry_essay_with_rich_text_1.png |alt="Composing question and responses for a chemistry essay with rich text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.  
+
   
#Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.  
+
:4. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
#Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', ''Disable auto link'' and adjust ''Font size''.
+
:5. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
+
:6. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.  
 +
:7. Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.  
 +
[[File:Chemistry_essay_with_rich_text_2.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and more options for a chemistry essay with rich text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4-7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
+
:8. Under '''Layout''' you can toggle ''Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle ''Spellcheck and text correction'', ''Disable auto link'' and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:9. Under '''Details''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
 +
[[File:Chemistry_essay_with_rich_text_3.png |alt="Layout and details options for a chemistry essay with rich text question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 8 & 9''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Details''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
 
:10. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:10. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
Line 998: Line 1,669:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
#Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response containers''' section. To add additional response fields, click the '''ADD''' button under ''Response positions''.  
+
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_with_image_1.png |alt="Composing question for a cloze chemistry with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same menu, you can setup a Formula template (global) to populate the response fields by arbitrary values. Entering anything in the Formula template (global) field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the Response containers (individual) field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue ADD button under Response Containers (individual) to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click ADD to create an additional one.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Set the points required for the correct answer under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' menu. Set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' and enter the appropriate values.  
+
 
#In the ''Responses'' menu, you can edit the ARIA label by toggling ''Edit ARIA label'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and choose whether or not to inverse the result by clicking ''Inverse result''.  
+
:3. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the '''Response positions''' section. To add additional response fields, click the '''ADD''' button under ''Response positions''.  
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
:4. Under the same menu, you can setup a ''Formula template (global)'' to populate the response fields by arbitrary values. Entering anything in the Formula template (global) field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the Response containers (individual) field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue '''ADD''' button under ''Response Containers (individual'') to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click '''ADD''' to create an additional one.
#For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
+
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_with_image_2.png |alt="Response options for a cloze chemistry with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
#You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
+
 
#Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad '''Type''' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
+
:5. Set the points required for the correct answer under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section. Set the scoring method to ''equivLiteral'' and enter the appropriate values.  
#Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
+
:6. In the ''Responses'' menu, you can edit the ARIA label by toggling ''Edit ARIA label'', toggle ''Ignore order'', and choose whether or not to inverse the result by clicking ''Inverse result''. To add additional scoring criteria, click the blue '''ADD''' button.  
#Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.
+
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_with_image_3.png |alt="Answer options for a cloze chemistry with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 +
:7. Under the '''More options''' section, you can set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty points'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:8. For scoring type, set it to '''Partial match per response''' to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers or '''Exact answer''' if your question has only one response. Make sure '''Enable auto scoring''' is checked so the question is automatically graded.  
 +
:9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
 +
:10. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_with_image_4.png |alt="More options and layout options for a cloze chemistry with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7-10''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:11. Under the '''Keypad''' section, you can change the keypad ''Type'' by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option ('''Recommended''': keep the keypad type as '''Floating''' so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).  
 +
:12. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the '''Number pad''' section.  
 +
:13. Again under the same menu, navigate to '''Symbols''' to add/delete the different ''Group''/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. '''IMPORTANT''': Make sure you add the '''Chemistry''' group under the '''Symbol''' section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.
 +
:14. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Cloze_chemistry_with_image_5.png |alt="Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze chemistry with image question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 11-14''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 1,016: Line 1,701:
  
 
:16. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:16. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 15 & 16''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
Line 1,022: Line 1,709:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.  
 
#Under '''Photo capture using built-in camera(s)''' you can toggle ''Enable photo capture'' to allow students to use built-in/attached webcams to take pictures of their responses and submit it.  
 
#Under '''Photo capture using built-in camera(s)''' you can toggle ''Enable photo capture'' to allow students to use built-in/attached webcams to take pictures of their responses and submit it.  
#Under '''Accepted file types''' you can specify the file types the students can submit. At the bottom of the menu you can also specify the ''Max files'' students are allowed to attach for the question.
+
[[File:File_upload_1.png |alt="Composing question for a file upload question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
+
#Under '''Details''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
+
  
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
+
:3. Under '''Accepted file types''' you can specify the file types the students can submit. At the bottom of the menu you can also specify the ''Max files'' students are allowed to attach for the question.
 +
[[File:File_upload_2.png |alt="Accepted file options for a file upload question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 3''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, set the '''Max score (required)''', assign a '''Minimum score if attempted''' (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to '''Submit over limit''' by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the '''Manage rubrics''' button.
 +
:5. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:6. Under '''Details''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
 +
[[File:File_upload_3.png |alt="More options, layout and details options for a file upload question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4-6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Details''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
 
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
+
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly. This question does not work in preview mode, meaning you cannot attach files when viewing a preview.
  
 
===Image Annotation Upload===
 
===Image Annotation Upload===
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
+
#In the '''Compose question''' field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
 
#In the '''Image preview''' section, click edit to either upload an image or click the ''More options'' drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.  
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' and modify the image dimensions.  
+
#You can choose to add ''Image alternative text'' and modify the image dimensions.
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can ''Enable auto scoring'', set a ''Minimum score if attempted'', set the ''Max score (required)'' and attach a rubric or create a new one by clicking the ''Manage rubrics'' button.  
+
[[File:Image_annotation_upload_1.png |alt="Composing question for an image annotation upload question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1-3''']]
#Set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by selecting the appropriate region(s) of the image. You can also toggle ''Multiple responses'' under the image if applicable.
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle whether or not the answer is ''Case sensitive'' and adjust ''Font size''.
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:4. Under the '''More options''' section, you can ''Enable auto scoring'' (currently does not work), set a ''Minimum score if attempted'' (not recommended), set the ''Max score (required)'' and attach a rubric or create a new one by clicking the ''Manage rubrics'' button.  
 +
:5. Under '''Layout''' you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle whether or not the answer is ''Case sensitive'' and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:6. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Image_annotation_upload_2.png |alt="More options, layout and extra options for an image annotation upload question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 4-6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
  
:8. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
+
:7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 7''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
Line 1,049: Line 1,752:
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#Under each '''Rating #''', where # is the rating number, specify the ''Value'' of the rating, the ''Label'' (the text that is displayed on the box), the ''Tooltip'' (the alternative text for that option), the ''Color'' to specify the color of the rating box once it is toggled, and a ''description'' if you would like to provide a description for the option.  
 
#Under each '''Rating #''', where # is the rating number, specify the ''Value'' of the rating, the ''Label'' (the text that is displayed on the box), the ''Tooltip'' (the alternative text for that option), the ''Color'' to specify the color of the rating box once it is toggled, and a ''description'' if you would like to provide a description for the option.  
#Under '''More options''' you can change the display formatting of the question, and adjust ''Font size''.
+
[[File:Rating_1.png |alt="Composing question for a rating question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:3. Under '''More options,''' you can change the display formatting of the question, and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:4. Under '''Extras,''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Rating_2.png |alt="More options and extras for a rating question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
:5. Questions that require manual grading/cannot be graded cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:5. Questions that require manual grading/cannot be graded cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Step 5''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
 
'''Note:''' Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.
  
 
===Gridded===
 
===Gridded===
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
 
#In the '''Compose question field''', enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.   
#Set the correct answer by under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section by selecting the correct responses for each field.  
+
#Under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section, set the correct answer by under the '''Set correct answer(s)''' section by selecting the correct responses for each field.  
#Under the '''More options''' section, you can specify the ''Default values'' of the grid, set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
+
[[File:Gridded_1.png |alt="Composing question and answer options for a gridded question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 1 & 2''']]
#Under the same menu, '''Enable auto scoring and set a ''Minimum score if attempted'',  if desired.  
+
<br style="clear: both"/>
#Under '''Layout''' you can change the number of ''Columns'', specify the ''Range of numbers to use'', specify which symbols you want to make available ''( Plus/minus column, Fraction slash, Fixed decimal, Floating decimal)'' and adjust ''Font size''.
+
 
#Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
+
:3. Under the '''More options''' section, you can specify the ''Default values'' of the grid, set the problem to be ''Unscored/Practice usage'', assign ''Penalty point(s)'', toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.  
 +
:4. Under the same menu, '''Enable auto scoring and set a ''Minimum score if attempted'',  if desired.  
 +
[[File:Gridded_2.png |alt="More options for a gridded question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 3 & 4''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 +
 
 +
:5. Under '''Layout''' you can change the number of ''Columns'', specify the ''Range of numbers to use'', specify which symbols you want to make available ''( Plus/minus column, Fraction slash, Fixed decimal, Floating decimal)'' and adjust ''Font size''.
 +
:6. Under '''Extras''' you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the ''Acknowledgments'' field and under ''Sample answer'' you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.  
 +
[[File:Gridded_3.png |alt="Layout and extra options for a gridded question"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 5 & 6''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
  
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
 
'''Note:''' The ''Acknowledgments'' and ''Sample answer'' fields under the '''Extras''' section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.
Line 1,069: Line 1,788:
  
 
:8. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 
:8. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the '''Save''' button to add it to the question list.  
 +
[[File:Save_BE.png |alt="Save and preview buttons"|thumb|left|550px|'''Steps 7 & 8''']]
 +
<br style="clear: both"/>
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
 
'''Note:''' Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.
  
==Relevant Resources==
+
=Relevant Resources=
 
For more information on BetterExaminations, please refer to the following resources:
 
For more information on BetterExaminations, please refer to the following resources:
 
+
<!--* For an instructor quick start guide on BetterExaminations, please refer to the following [https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/uwindsorbe/ instructor press book]. -->
* For an instructor quick start guide on BetterExaminations, please refer to the following [https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/uwindsorbe/ instructor press book].
+
 
+
 
*For additional documentation on all question types, please refer to the official [https://docs.betterexaminations.com/ BetterExaminations help page].
 
*For additional documentation on all question types, please refer to the official [https://docs.betterexaminations.com/ BetterExaminations help page].
*For instructional BetterExaminations videos, click the following link <'''LINK'''>.
 
  
==Related Articles==
+
*For instructional BetterExaminations videos, view the following <'''LINK'''>.
 +
 
 +
=Related Articles=
 
<!-- Related articles A: A little tricky thanks to MediaWiki's template system.-->
 
<!-- Related articles A: A little tricky thanks to MediaWiki's template system.-->
 
<div class="thumb tleft"><div class="thumbinner" style="width:350px;font-size:80%;text-align:left">
 
<div class="thumb tleft"><div class="thumbinner" style="width:350px;font-size:80%;text-align:left">
Line 1,088: Line 1,808:
 
{{Template:Errors or Omissions}}
 
{{Template:Errors or Omissions}}
 
[[Category:BetterExaminations]]
 
[[Category:BetterExaminations]]
[[Category:Blackboard]]
 
 
[[Category:Instructors]]
 
[[Category:Instructors]]

Latest revision as of 19:55, 2 December 2021

Contents

Overview

BetterExaminations is an online examination software integrated with UWindsor's directory that automatically syncs all courses and students to the site. The software has a plethora of question types and can serve as an alternative to Blackboard's assessment tool for instructors who are looking for more advanced and customizable questions. This wiki article will cover all question types in BetterExaminations, how to create them, different grading options, and important considerations when constructing the different question types.

Accessing BetterExaminations

To access BetterExaminations, go to https://uwindsorca.on.betterexaminations.com/ and it should automatically log you in using the University of Windsor's Single Sign On (SSO).

Alternatively, you can login to Blackboard by going to https://blackboard.uwindsor.ca/ and navigate to your course, then go to Control Panel -> Course Tools -> Better Exams to launch the software in a new browser window.

Creating a Question

To create a question in BetterExaminations:

  1. Click the Create new Question button to start creating a new question.  
  2. Enter a title for the question. 
  3. You can change the question display properties by clicking on the Settings icon and choose a layout from the available six formats.  
  4. In the details menu, you can set the status of the questions and scoring type.  
  5. Once you have adjusted the questions settings, click “Add new” to open the questions/features menu. 
  6. In the Questions tab, you can select a question type from a list of 54 question types. 
  7. Select the question you would like to create to launch the question creation window.

  To add questions from a question bank in BetterExaminations:

  1. Click the “Add from Question Bank” button to add previously created questions in the course. 
  2. In this menu, you search for a question by its title or click the down pointing arrow for more filter options, such as by content, question type, tags, etc.
  3. Can also click the Sort button to change the sorting type to by last updated, creation date, and alphabetical.
  4. To view more results, click the Next button to navigate to additional pages(if applicable).
  5. Once you have found the questions you would like to add, check the box to the left of the question name to select.
  6. When you are done selecting questions, click the Add n Question(s) button (where n is the number of selected questions) to add the selected questions to the exam.

Note: Creating any questions in a course will automatically add those questions to the course question bank. Questions in the course question bank can be used for future exams in the course.

Editing/Deleting a Question

To edit a question in BetterExaminations:

  1. Click the question title to launch the edit window
  2. Hover over the right side of the question text and click the pencil icon to launch the question in edit mode.
  3. Once you are done making changes, click Save. 

To delete a question in BetterExaminations:

  1. Click the question title to launch the edit window
  2. Hover over the right side of the question text and click the Garbage can icon and click Confirm? to delete the question.

Question Types

Multiple Choice

Multiple Choice - Standard

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Create the available answer choices under Multiple choice options. To add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
  • "Composing question and responses for a multiple choice question"
    Steps 1 & 2
3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
4. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of answers) or change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling Multiple responses.
  • "Answer options for multiple a choice question"
    Steps 3 & 4
5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
6. For scoring type, keep it as Exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
  • "More options for a multiple choice question"
    Steps 5-7
8. Under Layout and Selection you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
9. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
  • "Layout and selection & extra options for a multiple choice question"
    Steps 8 & 9

Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

10. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
  • "Save and preview buttons"
    Steps 10 & 11

Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Multiple Choice - Multiple Response

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Create the available answer choices under the Multiple choice options options. To add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
"Composing question and responses for a multiple response question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box to the left of the correct answers.

Note: The points set will be for each individual correct answer as the question has multiple correct responses. For example, setting the points to 1 for a question with 2 correct responses will set the total score of the question to 2 points.

4. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of answers).
"Answer options for a multiple response question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
6. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a multiple response question"
Steps 5-7


8. Under Layout and Selection you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
9. In the Extras section, you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and selection & extra options for a multiple response question"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

10. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 10 & 11


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

True or False

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Use the provided answer choices, true and false. If you would like to add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last response option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
"Composing question and responses for a true or falsequestion"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
4. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
5. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
6. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"Answer options and more options for a true or false question"
Steps 3-6


7. Under Layout and Selection you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
8. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and selection & extra options for a true or false question"
Steps 7 & 8


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

9. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
10. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Multiple Choice - Block Layout

This question type is identical to the standard multiple choice question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. The block layout has the responses in slightly shaded blocks as opposed to plain text provided in the standard multiple choice question type and has larger text for the different options (A, B, C, etc.).

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Create the available answer choices under Multiple choice options. To add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last multiple choice option. To delete responses click the bin icon to the right of the response.
"Composing question and responses for a multiple choice - block layout question"
Steps 1 & 2


3.Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answer by checking the box to the left of the correct answer.
4. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of answers) or change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling Multiple responses.
"Answer options for a multiple choice - block layout question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
6. For scoring type, keep it as Exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a multiple choice - block layout question"
Steps 5-7


8. Under Layout and Selection you can change the display formatting of the question.
9. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and selection & extra options for a multiple choice - block layout question"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

10. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 10 & 11


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Choice Matrix - Standard

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Create the different question statements under the Stems section. To add more statements, click the blue ADD button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
  3. Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false) under Options.
"Composing question and responses for a choice matrix - standard question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.
5. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of questions) and change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling Multiple responses.
"Answer options for a choice matrix - standard question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a choice matrix - standard question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and change the Font size.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a choice matrix - standard question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Choice Matrix - Inline

This question type is identical to the standard choice matrix question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. This question type has the options inline as opposed in the question header ( the options are not in the column header, they are located to the right of the checkboxes).

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Create the different question statements under the Stems section. To add more statements, click the blue ADD button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
  3. Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false) under Options.
"Composing question and responses for a choice matrix - inline question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.
5. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of questions) and change the question type to a multiple answer type question by toggling Multiple responses.
"Answer options for a choice matrix - inline question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a choice matrix - inline question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust the Font size.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a choice matrix - inline question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Choice Matrix - Labels

This question type is identical to the standard choice matrix question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. This question type has the labels to the left of the statement text. This question type is identical to the standard choice matrix question in terms of creation. The only difference is the question display layout. This question type has the options inline as opposed in the question header ( the options are not in the column header, they are located to the right of the checkboxes).

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Create the different question statements under the Stems section. To add more statements, click the blue ADD button under the last option. To delete statements, click the bin icon to the right of the statement.
  3. Set the appropriate selectable options for the created question statements (i.e., true/false) under Options.
"Composing question and responses for a choice matrix - labels question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by checking the box under the appropriate option.
5. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of questions) and add Multiple responses for the question.
"Answer options for a choice matrix - labels question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a choice matrix - labels question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extras options for a choice matrix - labels question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Fill in the Blanks (Cloze)

Cloze with Drag & Drop

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Enter the question text in the Template markup field. To add the response field click on the text field and click the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to add it to the text field. The response box can be moved. To delete it, simply select it and click the backspace key on your keyboard.
  3. Create the appropriate responses under the Possible responses section. To add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last option.
"Composing question and responses for a cloze with drag and drop question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by dragging and dropping the responses in the correct location.
5. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of answers), Duplicate responses, toggle whether to Show drag handle, and an option to Match all possible responses.
"Answer options for a cloze with drag and drop question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a cloze with drag and drop question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a cloze with drag and drop question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Cloze with Drop-Down

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Enter the question text in the Template markup field. To add the response field click on the text field and click the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to add it to the text field. The response box can be moved. To delete it, simply select it and click the backspace key on your keyboard.
  3. Create the appropriate responses under the Possible responses section. For each response, add a number of selectable responses from the drop-down. To add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last option.
"Composing question and responses for a cloze with drop-down question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by selecting them from the drop-down.
5. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of answers), Duplicate responses, toggle whether to Show drag handle, and an option to Match all possible responses.
"Answer options for a cloze with drop-down question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a cloze with drop-down question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a cloze with drop-down question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Cloze with Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Enter the question text in the Template markup field. To add a response field, click on the text field and click the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to add it to the text field. The response box can be moved. To delete it, simply select it and click the backspace key on your keyboard.
"Composing question and responses for a cloze with text question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Enter the appropriate responses under the Set correct answer(s) section. You can set up alternate answers for the question by clicking the + button next to the Correct box. This is useful when the order of the responses is not important.
4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer.
"Answer options for a cloze with text question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as toggle whether or not the answers are case sensitive by toggling Case sensitive.
6. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7.You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a cloze with text question"
Steps 5-7


8. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle the feature to accept Special characters, set the question to be Multiple line, adjust Font size. and whether or not you would like to toggle Spellcheck and text correction.
9. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a cloze with text question"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

10. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
11. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 10 & 11


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Label Image with Drag & Drop

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview click edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
"Composing question and responses for a label image with drag and drop question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the Response containers section. You can adjust the number of answers per field by specifying the number in the Maximum responses per container field.
"Setting answer positions for a label image with drag and drop question"
Step 3


4. Create the appropriate responses under the Possible responses section. To add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last option.
"Answer options (1) for a label image with drag and drop question"
Step 4


5. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by dragging and dropping the responses to the correct location on image.
6. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of answers), duplicate responses, show the drag handle when dragging a response and add transparency to the responses.
"Answer options (2) for a label image with drag and drop question"
Steps 5 & 6


7. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
8. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a label image with drag and drop question"
Steps 7-9


10. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
11. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a label image with drag and drop question"
Steps 10 & 11


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 12 & 23


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Label Image with Drop-Down

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview section, click edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
  3. You can choose to add Image alternative text for the image, and add Text on hover, if desired.
"Composing question and responses for a label image with drop-down question"
Steps 1-3


4. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the Response positions section. You can add more responses by click ADD under Response positions. You can also toggle the option to Edit ARIA labels in the same section.
"Response positions for a label image with drop-down question"
Step 4


5. Create the appropriate responses under the Possible responses section. For each response, add a number of selectable responses from the drop-down. To add more responses, click the blue ADD button under the last option.
"Answer options (1) for a label image with drop-down question"
Step 5


6. Under the Set correct answer(s) section,, set the points required for the correct answer and select the correct answers by selecting them from the drop-down.
7. You can choose to Shuffle options (randomize order of answers).
"Answer options (2) for a label image with drop-down question"
Steps 6 & 7


8. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
9. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
10. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a label image with drop-down question"
Steps 8-10


11. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question, change the Image scale, adjust Font size and customize the Pointer location.
12. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a label image with drop-down question"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

13. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 13 & 14


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Label Image with Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview section, click edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
  3. You can choose to add Image alternative text for the image, and add Text on hover, if desired.
"Composing question and responses for a label image with text question"
Steps 1-3


4. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the Response positions section. You can add more responses by clicking ADD under Response positions. You also toggle to Edit ARIA labels.
"Response positions for a label image with text question"
Step 4


5. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by inserting them in the appropriate field.
"Answer options for a label image with text question"
Step 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle if the answers are Case sensitive, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a label image with text question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question, change the Image scale, adjust Font size and customize the Pointer location.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a label image with text question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Classify, Match & Order

Classification

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Specify the Column count and Row count (number of rows/columns) by inserting the appropriate integers in the two boxes.
  3. Specify the column and row titles under Column titles and Row titles, respectively. To add additional columns/rows, click the the ADD button under the appropriate section.
"Composing question and responses for a classification question"
Steps 1-3


4. Specify all possible answers under the Possible responses section. To add more responses, click the ADD button under the last response.
"Answer options (1) for a classification question"
Step 4


5. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by dragging and dropping them into the row/column.
6. You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling Show drag handle,, Shuffle options to randomize the order of the given responses, and Duplicate responses if a response is applicable to more than one cell.
"Answer options (2) for a classification question"
Steps 5 & 6


7. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
8. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per cell to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a classification question"
Steps 7-9


10. Under Layout you can customize the Response container position, Row titles width, Row min height, the Row header, specify the Maximum responses per cell, and adjust Font size.
11. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a classification question"
Steps 10 & 11


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 12 & 13


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Match List

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Specify the first columns of the question by filling in the responses under Stimulus list.
  3. Specify all possible answers under the Possible responses section. To add more responses, click the ADD button under the last response.
"Composing question and responses for a match list question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by dragging and dropping them into the appropriate position.
5. You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling Show drag handle, Shuffle options to randomize the order of the given responses, and Duplicate responses if a response is applicable to more than one position.
"Answer options for a match list question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a match list question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can customize the Response container position and adjust Font size.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a match list question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Order List

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Construct a list of items to be sorted by adding them under the List section. To add more items to the list, click the ADD button under the last item.
"Composing question and responses for an order list question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by dragging and dropping them in the appropriate order.
4. You can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling Show drag handle, and toggle Shuffle options to randomize the order of the given responses.
"Answer options for an order list question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
6. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7. Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to Exact match if you want students to get marks only if all their responses are sorted appropriately.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for an order list question"
Steps 5-8


9. Under Layout you can customize the List style, and adjust Font size.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for an order list question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Sort List

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Construct a list of items to be sorted by adding them under the List section. To add more items to the list, click the blue ADD button under the last item.
"Composing question and responses for a sort list question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by dragging and dropping them in the appropriate order.
4. You can choose to Shuffle options to randomize the order of the given responses.
"Answer options for a sort list question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
6. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for each correct answer. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7. Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to Exact match if you want students to get marks only if all their responses are sorted appropriately.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a sort list question"
Steps 5-8


9. Under Layout you can choose to show the drag handle upon hovering by enabling Show drag handle, and adjust Font size.
10. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a sort list question"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

11. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
12. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Written & Recorded

Essay with Rich Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under Text formatting options, you can select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.
  3. Under the same menu, you can also set a Word limit on responses, select the Word limit visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the Show word count button.
"Composing question and responses for a written and recorded question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the More options section, set the Max score (required), assign a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to Submit over limit by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the Manage rubrics button.
"More options for a written and recorded question"
Step 4


5. Under Layout you can toggle Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle Spellcheck and text correction, Disable auto link and adjust Font size.
6. Under Details you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and details options for a written and recorded question"
Steps 5 & 6


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Details section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 7


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Essay with Plain Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. You can toggle the formatting options that can be checked – Copy, Cut and Paste.
  3. Under the same menu, you can also set a Word limit on responses, select the Word limit visibility from the drop-down.
"Composing question and responses for an essay with plain text question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the More options section, set the Max score (required), assign a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to Submit over limit by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the Manage rubrics button.
"More options for an essay with plain text  question"
Step 4


5. Under Layout you can toggle Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle Spellcheck and text correction, and adjust Font size.
6. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for an essay with plain text  question"
Steps 5 & 6


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 7


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Short Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under the Set the correct answer(s) section, set the correct answers by either setting Allow to Any text containing or Exact match from the drop-down and type the keyword in the Value textbox. To add alternate answers to the question (i.e., multiple keywords) click the + icon to the right of the correct cell.
"Composing question and responses for a short text question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question as well as set a Character limit.
4. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a short text question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle the feature to accept Special characters, set the question Input type to either text or number, , set a Placeholder, adjust Font size. and whether or not you would like to toggle Spellcheck and text correction.
6. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a short text question"
Steps 5 & 6


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

7. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
8. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 7 & 8


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Audio Recorder

1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
2. You can change the Player type, and set the Maximum length (seconds) allowed for the recording.
"Composing question and responses for an audio recorder question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the More options section, you can set the Max score (required), set a minimum score if attempted, set the Silence stop duration, toggle whether or not you would like to prompt students with an Overwrite warning when trying to re-record, and associate a rubric with the recording by clicking Manage rubrics to add a previously created rubric or to create a new one.
"More options for an audio recorder  question"
Step 3


4. Under UI settings, you can toggle a variety of options for Recording, Playback and Layout of the question, as well as adjust Font size.
5. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
"UI settings and extra options for an audio recorder question"
Steps 4 & 5


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

6. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 6


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Video Recorder

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question and provide a link to a recording or use the embed feature in the text editor to insert a video. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Set the Maximum length (seconds) allowed for the video recording, and toggle whether or not you would like to prompt students with an Overwrite warning when trying to re-record
"Composing question and responses for a video recorder question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the More options section, you can set the Max score (required), set a minimum score if attempted, and associate a rubric with the recording by clicking Manage rubrics to add a previously created rubric or to create a new one.
4. Under Layout, you can adjust Font size.
5. Under Details you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
"More options and details options for a video recorder question"
Steps 4 & 5


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Details section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

6. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 6


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Highlight and Drawing

Highlight Image

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview section, click Edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions and add Image alternative text for the image, and add Text on hover, if desired.
  3. You can choose to change/add additional line color options under the Line color options menu.
"Composing question and responses for a highlight image question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the More options section, set the Max score (required), assign a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the Manage rubrics button to create a new rubric or use a saved one.
5. Under Layout you can change the Line width, and adjust Font size
6. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"More options, layout and extra for a highlight image question"
Steps 4-6


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 7


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Drawing

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. You can toggle a variety of tools and formatting options under the Toggle toolbar options and Text formatting options menus, respectively.
"Composing question and responses for a drawing question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. In the Image preview section, click Edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
4. You can choose to add Image alternative text for the image, and change the Width of the image, if desired.
5. You can choose to change/add additional line color options under the Drawing line and text color menu.
"Image preview options for a drawing question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, set the Max score (required), assign a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the Manage rubrics button to create a new rubric or use a saved one.
7. Under Layout you can change the Line width, toggle special characters, and adjust Font size
8. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"More options, layout and extra options for a drawing question"
Steps 6-8


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

9. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 9


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Shading

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under the Canvas options menu you can set the Row count, Column count, Cell width and Cell height.
"Composing question and responses for a shading question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Shade cells menu you can shade specific cells to change how the diagram is presented to students. You can also choose to Lock shaded cells, add a Shading image, add Image alternative text, and assign an Image title.
"Shade cell options for a shading question"
Step 3


4. Set the correct answer by under the Set correct answer(s) section by shading the correct response. You can change the scoring method to either by byLocation, or byCount.
"Answer options for a shading question"
Step 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
6. For the Scoring type, set it to Exact match or Partial match depending on the circumstance and don't forget to Enable auto scoring.
7. Under the same menu, you can set a Minimum score if attempted, if desired.
"More options for a shading question"
Steps 5-7


8. Under Layout and Selection you can toggle Hide cells, change the Border type set the Maximum number of responses, enable Hover state, and adjust Font size.
"Layout and selection options for a shading question"
Step 8


9. Under the Background image section, you can choose to upload an image from your local computer or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host.
10. In the same menu, you can add Image alternative text, assign an Image title and modify the display properties and dimensions of the image.
11. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Background image and extra options for a shading question"
Steps 9-11


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 12 & 13


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Token Highlight

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under the Template section, you can edit the template (question content) by clicking on Edit Template and toggle the highlightable Sentence/Paragraph/Word by clicking the Edit Token button.
"Composing question and responses for a token highlight question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section,, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by highlighting them.
"Answer options for a token highlight question"
Step 3


4. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points (recommended, to avoid students from highlighting all options), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
5. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
6. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a token highlight question"
Steps 4-6


7. Under Layout and Selection you can adjust Font size (currently does not work) and specify the Maximum number of responses.
8. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and selection and extra options for a token highlight question"
Steps 7 & 8


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

9. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
10. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 9 & 10


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Hotspot

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview section, click edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
  3. You can choose to add Image alternative text and modify the image dimensions.
"Composing question and responses for a hotspot question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Areas section, draw the regions you would like students to be able to highlight in their responses.
5. Under Attributes you can change the Fill color and Outline color.
"Areas and attributes options for a hotspot question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answers by selecting the appropriate region(s) of the image. You can also toggle Multiple responses under the image if applicable.
"Answer options for a hotspot question"
Step 6


7. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points (recommended, to avoid students from highlighting all options), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
8. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a hotspot question"
Steps 7-9


10. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question, and adjust Font size.
11. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a hotspot question"
Steps 10 & 11


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 12 & 13


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math

Math Formula

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Template field.
"Composing question and responses for a math formula question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivValue for the response(s) (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number for the response, otherwise select another scoring Method), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of Significant decimal places, toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, and toggle whether or not you would like to Ignore text provided in the response field.
5. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under the Allow decimal marks toggle.
"Answer options for a math formula question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, keep it as Exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a math formula question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"Layout options for a math formula question"
Step 9


10. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
12. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
13. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math formula question"
Steps 10-13


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math with Fractions

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Template field.
"Composing question and responses for a math with fractions question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivliteral for the response(s) (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring Method), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of Significant decimal places, toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, toggle Ignore order, and toggle whether or not you would like to Allow interval, Inverse result, and Compare grouping for the response.
5. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under the Allow decimal marks toggle.
"Answer options for a math with fractions question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a math with fractions question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"Layout options for a math with fractions question"
Step 9


10. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
12. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
13. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math with fractions question"
Steps 10-13


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math - Fill in the Blanks

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Template field.
"Composing question and responses for a math - fill in the blanks question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivLiteral for the response(s) (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring Method), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the Value field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the Template field, but this time, replacing the response field with the correct answer. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of Significant decimal places, toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, toggle Ignore order, and toggle whether or not you would like to Allow interval, Inverse result, and Compare grouping for the response.
5. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under the Allow decimal marks toggle.
"Answer options for a math - fill in the blanks question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, keep it as Exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a math - fill in the blanks question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under the Layout section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"Layout options for a math - fill in the blanks question"
Step 9


10. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
12. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
13. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math - fill in the blanks question"
Steps 10-13


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math with Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Template field.
"Composing question and responses for a math with text question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivLiteral for the response(s) (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring Method), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the Value field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the Template field, but this time, replacing the response field with the correct answer. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of Significant decimal places, toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, toggle Ignore order (recommended), and toggle whether or not you would like to Allow interval, Inverse result, and Compare grouping for the response.
5. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under the Allow decimal marks toggle.
"Answer options for a math with text question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a math with text question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"Layout options for a math with text question"
Step 9


10. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
12. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
13. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math with text question"
Steps 10-13


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math with Matrices

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Template field.
"Composing question and responses for a math with matrices question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivLiteral for the response(s) (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring Method), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the Value field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the Template field, but this time, replacing the response field with the correct answer. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of Significant decimal places, toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, toggle Ignore order, and toggle whether or not you would like to Allow interval, Inverse result, and Compare grouping for the response.
5. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under the Allow decimal marks toggle.
"Answer options for a math with matrices  question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a math with matrices question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under the Layout section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"Layout options for a math with matrices question"
Step 9


10. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
12. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
13. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a math with matrices question"
Steps 10-13


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math with Units

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Template field. Don't forget to provide units in the template field!
"Composing question and responses for a math with units question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivLiteral for the response(s) (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number/expression for a response, otherwise select another scoring Method), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. For the Value field, make sure to enter the same expression as in the Template field, but this time, replacing the response field with the correct answer (make sure to include units). You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of Significant decimal places, toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, toggle Ignore order, and toggle whether or not you would like to Allow interval, Inverse result, and Compare grouping for the response.
5. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under the Allow decimal marks toggle.
"Answer options for a math with units question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, keep it as exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a math with units question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"Layout options for a math with units question"
Step 9


10. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
12. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
"Keypad and symbols options for a math with units question"
Steps 10-12


13. Under Text blocks, you can specify the units for all text blocks.
14. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Text blocks and extra options for a math with units question"
Steps 13 & 14


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

15. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
16. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 15 & 16


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math Essay with Rich Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under Text formatting options, you select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.
  3. Under the same menu, you can also set a Word limit on responses, select the Word limit visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the Show word count button.
"Composing question and responses for a math essay with rich text question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Keypad section, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section. You can also enable Show keypad hints and Enable horizontal keypad.
5. Under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in keypad functions.
"Keypad, and symbols options for a math essay with rich text question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, set the Max score (required), assign a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to Submit over limit by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the Manage rubrics button.
7. Under Layout you can toggle Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle Spellcheck and text correction, Disable auto link and adjust Font size.
8. Under Details you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"More options, layout and details options for a math essay with rich text question"
Steps 6-8


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Details section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

9. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 9


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Cloze Math

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Formula template field.
"Composing question and responses for a cloze math question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivLiteral for all responses (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter an expression as a response), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly. Make sure to only include the correct answer in the Value field and to also toggle Ignore order.
4. Under the same section, you can toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, toggle Ignore order, Ignore trailing zeros, toggle whether or not you would like to Allow interval, Inverse result, and Compare grouping for the response.
5. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under the Allow decimal marks toggle.
"Answer options for a cloze math question"
Steps 3-5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response, to ensure students get partial marks for partially correct responses. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a cloze math question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout, you can change the display formatting of the question, adjust Font size, and setup a Formula template (global) to populate the response fields by arbitrary values/expressions. Entering anything in the Formula template (global) field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the Response containers (individual) field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue ADD button under Response Containers (individual) to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click ADD to create an additional one.
"Layout options for a cloze math question"
Step 9


10. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field). You can also enable Show keypad hints, Enable horizontal keypad and toggle Place keypad below response area.
11. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
12. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
13. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze math question"
Steps 10-13


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

14. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
15. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Cloze Math with Image

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview section, click edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
  3. You can choose to add Image alternative text for the image, and add Text on hover, if desired.
"Composing question for a cloze math with image question"
Steps 1-3


4. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the Response positions section. You can add more responses by click ADD under Response positions.
5. Under the same section, entering anything in the Formula template (global) field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the Response containers (individual) field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue ADD button under Response Containers (individual) to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click ADD to create an additional one.
"Response options for a cloze math with image question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivValue for all responses (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to enter a number for a response), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly. Make sure to only include the correct answer in the Value field.
7. Under the same section, you set the maximum amount of Significant decimal places, toggle the option to Allow decimal marks, toggle Ignore text, and toggle whether or not you would like to Compare sides for the response.
"Answer options for a cloze math with image question"
Steps 6 & 7


8. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
9. For scoring type, keep it as Exact match, as there is only one correct answer for this question type. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
10. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
11. Under the Layout section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"More options for a cloze math with image question"
Steps 8-11


12. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
13. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
14. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
15. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze math with image question"
Steps 12-15


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

16. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 16 & 17


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Math Question Generator

  1. For the Parameters menu, under the Create parameters and set their values provide the Parameter name, the Value type (Range/List), set Min/Max values and the Step incrementing factor. To add additional parameters, click the blue Add parameter button at the bottom.
  2. Once you are done adding/modifying parameters, click Next.
"Composing parameters for a math question generator question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. In the Expression & Question menu, under the Create the expression with the parameter(s) section, create an expression that generates the answer to the question. To add the created parameters into the expression, click the Stacked coins icon in the top right corner and select the appropriate parameter from the drop-down to insert it into the text box.
4. In the same menu, under the Compose the question section, enter your question text. Be sure to provide the parameters in the question text so that students are able to see the parameters which change in value. To add the parameters, click the Parameters button in the text editor toolbar and select the appropriate parameter from the drop-down. Be sure to also provide a response box by clicking the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol.
5. Once you are done making changes, click Next.
"Composing question and answer options for a math question generator question"
Steps 3-5


6. In the Answer formats menu, under the Select the correct answer format(s) section, select the accepted formats for this question (Original expression, Fraction, Decimal value, & Scientific).
7. In the same menu, under the More options section, set the Score(points), the type of Decimal separator (Dot/Comma), the type of Thousands operator (Dot, Comma, Space, Space, dot, & Space, comma), and set the number of Decimal places (max of 10).
8. Once you are done making changes, click Next.
"Answer format options for a math question generator question"
Steps 3-5


9. In the Generate menu, a total of 50 different variations will be generated based on the parameter settings set in the Parameters menu. To generate new variations of the parameters, click the blue Regenerate button. To delete unwanted variations, select the variation by checking the box to the left of the variation and clicking the Remove button at the top of the page.
10. Once you are done making changes, click Apply to save the variations and move on to the final menu.
"Generated question options for a math question generator question"
Steps 9 & 10


11. Under Layout you can change the display dimensions of the response box and provide an ARIA label.
12. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
13. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section. You can also enable Show keypad hints and Enable horizontal keypad.
14. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the appropriate group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in equations.
"Layout, keypad, and symbols options for a math question generator question"
Steps 11-14


15. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
16. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
17. Under the Layout section, you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
18. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"More options, layout and extra options for a math question generator question"
Steps 15-18


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

19. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
20. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 19 & 20


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Graphing

Graphing

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Graph parameters section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the graph.
  3. Under Tools you can add individual tools for students to use when attempting the question, by clicking the ADD button or you can click the ADD GROUP button to add a variety of tools in a single drop-down.
  4. After adding the appropriate number of buttons, customize the buttons by clicking the drop-down under the appropriate button/group.
"Composing question, graph parameters and tools for a graphing question"
Steps 1-4


5. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct shape using the graphing tools.
6. In the same menu, set Ignore repeated shapes to no or any of the other options if desired. For more info on this option, please refer to the following BetterExaminations help page.
"Answer options for a graphing question"
Steps 5 & 6


7.Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you Enable auto scoring to ensure the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"More options for a graphing question"
Steps 7-9


10. Under the Grid section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing the number under the X/Y distance text.
11. In the same section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the number under the Tick distance text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.
12. Under the Controls section, you can add/remove different edit options (Undo, Redo, Delete, Reset).
13. Under the Annotation section, you can label the different axes as well as assign a title to the plot.
"Grid, controls, and annotation options for a graphing question"
Steps 10-13


14. You can choose to attach and customize a background image under the Background image section.
15. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Extra options for a graphing question"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

16. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 16 & 17


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Graphing in the First Quadrant

The construction of this question is identical to the previous one. The only difference is that for this question, students are restricted to graphing in only the first quadrant.

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Graph parameters section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the graph.
  3. Under Tools you can add individual tools for students to use when attempting the question, by clicking the ADD button or you can click the ADD GROUP button to add a variety of tools in a single drop-down.
  4. After adding the appropriate number of buttons, customize the buttons by clicking the drop-down under the appropriate button/group.
"Composing question, graph parameters and tools for a graphing question"
Steps 1-4


5. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct shape using the graphing tools.
6. In the same menu, set Ignore repeated shapes to no or any of the other options if desired. For more info on this option, please refer to the following BetterExaminations help page.
"Answer options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"
Steps 5 & 6


7. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you Enable auto scoring to ensure the question is automatically graded
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"More options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"
Steps 7-9


10. Under the Grid section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing the number under the X/Y distance text.
11. In the same section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the number under the Tick distance text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.
12. Under the Controls section, you can add/remove different edit options (Undo, Redo, Delete, Reset).
13. Under the Annotation section, you can label the different axes as well as assign a title to the plot.
"Grid, controls and annotation options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"
Steps 10-13


14. You can choose to attach and customize a background image under the Background image section.
15. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Extra options for a graphing in the first quadrant question"
Steps 14 & 15


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

16. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
17. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 16 & 17


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Number Line with Drag & Drop

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Line section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the line graph.
  3. In the same section, you can assign a Title to the line graph.
"Composing question and line options for a number line with drag and drop question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Points section enter the different points you would like to make selectable for the question.
5. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and drag and drop the points to the correct positions.
"Points and answer options for a number line with drag and drop question"
Steps 4 & 5


6. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
7. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
8. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).\
"More options for a number line with drag and drop question"
Steps 6-8


9. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
10. Under the Ticks section you can customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing Tick distance. You can also change the tick format and tick visibility.
"Layout and tick options for a number line with drag and drop question"
Steps 9 & 10


11. Under the Labels section, you can adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the the number under the Frequency text. You can also adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu.
12. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Labels and extra options for a number line with drag and drop question"
Steps 11 & 12


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

13. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 13 & 14


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Number Line with Plot

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Line section, you can set the minimum and maximum x and y values students will be able to select on the line graph, assign a title to the number line, and limit the number of lines/points students are allowed to draw on the number line by adjusting the Number of responses allowed field.
"Composing question and line options for a number line with plot question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and draw the correct points/intervals using the graphing tools.
4. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
5. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers or change it to Exact match (depending on the question). Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
6. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"Answer options and more options for a number line with plot question"
Steps 3-6


7. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and minimum/maximum interval arrows, and adjust Font size.
8. Under the Toolbar section, you can choose to add and customize a toolbar, if desired.

Note: Customizing the toolbar will remove all default tools from the toolbar.

9. Under the Ticks section you can change the visibility of the points, customize the point interval (the interval at which you move the point) by changing Minor ticks. You can also adjust the incrementing/decrementing interval on the graph by changing the the number under the Tick distance text.
"Layout, toolbar, and tick options for a number line with plot question"
Steps 7-9


10. Under the Labels section, you can adjust a variety of graph display options in the same menu (Show labels, Show min, Display specific points, Show max).
11. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Labels and extra options for a number line with plot question"
Steps 10 & 11


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

12. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
13. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 12 & 13


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Charts

Bar Chart

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Chart section, you can assign a Name to the chart, set a X axis label, Y axis label as well as set a Max Y value.
  3. Under each Point # section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a Label, set a default initial Value and make sure you check Interactive to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the ADD button.
"Composing question, chart, and point options for a bar chart question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the bar chart.
"Answer options for a bar chart question"
Step 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you Enable auto scoring to ensure the question is automatically graded
"More options for a bar chart question"
Step 5


6. Under the Layout section you can change the Chart type (Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart), adjust formatting options (option to Convert slashes to stacked fractions, toggle the ability for students to Add points, allow students to Edit point label for each individual point, and toggle Multicolor bars, which currently does not work with this question type) , set point options (Resize point, Delete point, Order point) and adjust Font size.
7. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a bar chart question"
Steps 6 & 7


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

8. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Line Chart

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Chart section, you can assign a Name to the chart, set a X axis label, Y axis label as well as set a Max Y value.
  3. Under each Point # section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a Label, set a default initial Value and make sure you check Interactive to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the ADD button.
"Composing question, chart, and point options for a line chart question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the line chart.
"Answer options for a line chart question"
Step 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you Enable auto scoring to ensure the question is automatically graded
"More options for a line chart question"
Step 5


6. Under the Layout section you can change the Chart type (Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart), adjust formatting options (option to Convert slashes to stacked fractions, toggle the ability for students to Add points, allow students to Edit point label for each individual point, and toggle Multicolor bars) , set point options (Resize point, Delete point, Order point) and adjust Font size.
7. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a line chart question"
Steps 6 & 7


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

8. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Histogram

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Chart section, you can assign a Name to the chart, set a X axis label, Y axis label as well as set a Max Y value.
  3. Under each Point # section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a Label, set a default initial Value and make sure you check Interactive to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the ADD button.
"Composing question, chart, and point options for a histogram question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the bars.
"Answer options for a histogram question"
Step 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you Enable auto scoring to ensure the question is automatically graded
"More options for a histogram question"
Step 5


6. Under the Layout section you can change the Chart type (Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart), adjust formatting options (option to Convert slashes to stacked fractions, toggle the ability for students to Add points, allow students to Edit point label for each individual point, and toggle Multicolor bars) , set point options (Resize point, Delete point, Order point) and adjust Font size. Make sure to toggle Multicolor bars so students will be able to differentiate between the different bars, as in a histogram, there is no space between the various bars.
7. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a histogram question"
Steps 6 & 7


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

8. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Dot Plot

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Chart section, you can assign a Name to the chart, set a X axis label, Y axis label as well as set a Max Y value.
  3. Under each Point # section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a Label, set a default initial Value and make sure you check Interactive to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the ADD button.
"Composing question, chart, and point options for a dot plot question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the dot plot.
"Answer options for a dot plot question"
Step 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you Enable auto scoring to ensure the question is automatically graded.
"More options for a dot plot question"
Step 5


6. Under the Layout section you can change the Chart type (Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart), adjust formatting options (option to Convert slashes to stacked fractions, toggle the ability for students to Add points, allow students to Edit point label for each individual point, and toggle Multicolor bars) , set point options (Resize point, Delete point, Order point) and adjust Font size.
7. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a dot plot question"
Steps 6 & 7


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

8. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Line Plot

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Under the Chart section, you can assign a Name to the chart, set a X axis label, Y axis label as well as set a Max Y value.
  3. Under each Point # section, where # is the point number, make sure to assign a Label, set a default initial Value and make sure you check Interactive to ensure students will be able to adjust the bar graph point(s). You can add additional points by scrolling to the bottom of the last created point and click the ADD button.
"Composing question, chart, and point options for a line plot question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer and set the correct answer by adjusting the line plot.
"Answer options for a line plot question"
Step 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. Make sure you Enable auto scoring to ensure the question is automatically graded.
"More options for a line plot question"
Step 5


6. Under the Layout section you can change the Chart type (Bar chart, Line chart, Histogram chart, Dot plot chart, Line plot chart), adjust formatting options (option to Convert slashes to stacked fractions, toggle the ability for students to Add points, allow students to Edit point label for each individual point, and toggle Multicolor bars) , set point options (Resize point, Delete point, Order point) and adjust Font size.
7. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a line plot question"
Steps 6 & 7


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

8. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
9. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Chemistry

Chemistry Formula

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field by inserting the r in the Template field.
"Composing question for a chemistry formula question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivLiteral, and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. Under the same menu there is an option to Ignore order and Inverse result. To add additional scoring methods, click the ADD button under Inverse result.
"Answer options for a chemistry formula question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
6. For scoring type, set it to Exact match so that only fully correct answers are assigned a grade. Alternatively, you can set the scoring type to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
8. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"More options for a chemistry formula question"
Steps 5-8


9. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
10. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
11. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the Chemistry group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.
12. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a chemistry formula question"
Steps 9-12


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

13. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 13 & 14


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Cloze Chemistry

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question as well as insert images/tables and Latex if desired.
  2. Setup the response template field using text/Latex and by inserting the "letter r enclosed in dotted box" symbol to insert response fields in the Formula template field.
"Composing question and responses for a cloze chemistry question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the points required for the correct answer, set the scoring method to equivValue for all responses (IMPORTANT: Assuming you are creating a question where students are required to balance a chemical equation), and construct the appropriate response(s) using the text editor. You can also toggle Edit ARIA label to adjust the ARIA label accordingly.
4. You can also change the maximum allowed amount of Significant decimal places in the same section as well as add additional scoring methods, by clicking the blue ADD button at the bottom.
"Answer options for a cloze chemistry question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers.
6. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
7. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
"More options for a cloze chemistry question"
Steps 5-7


8. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question, adjust Font size, and setup a Formula template (global) to populate the response fields by arbitrary values. Entering anything in the Formula template (global) field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the Response containers (individual) field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue ADD button under Response Containers (individual) to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click ADD to create an additional one.
"Layout options for a cloze chemistry question"
Step 8


9. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
10. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
11. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the Chemistry group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.
12. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze chemistry question"
Steps 9-12


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

13. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
14. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 13 & 14


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Chemistry Essay with Rich Text

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under Text formatting options, you select which formatting options you would like to make available for students when attempting the question. To toggle an option, simply click the formatting icon and it should turn blue.
  3. Under the same menu, you can also set a Word limit on responses, select the Word limit visibility from the drop-down and toggle whether or not you would like students to see the word count when attempting the question by toggling the Show word count button.
"Composing question and responses for a chemistry essay with rich text question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
5. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
6. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the Chemistry group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.
7. Under the More options section, set the Max score (required), assign a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to Submit over limit by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the Manage rubrics button.
"Keypad, symbols and more options for a chemistry essay with rich text question"
Steps 4-7


8. Under Layout you can toggle Special characters, change the display formatting of the question, toggle Spellcheck and text correction, Disable auto link and adjust Font size.
9. Under Details you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and details options for a chemistry essay with rich text question"
Steps 8 & 9


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Details section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

10. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 10


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Cloze Chemistry with Image

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview click edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
"Composing question for a cloze chemistry with image question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Drag and drop the answer fields to the appropriate location on the image under the Response positions section. To add additional response fields, click the ADD button under Response positions.
4. Under the same menu, you can setup a Formula template (global) to populate the response fields by arbitrary values. Entering anything in the Formula template (global) field will apply that template to all response fields. If for example, the question has more than one response fields, it would be best to use the Response containers (individual) field if you would like to have differing values in each response field. To add individual response fields, click the blue ADD button under Response Containers (individual) to add a response container for the first container. To add additional response containers, scroll down to the last created option and click ADD to create an additional one.
"Response options for a cloze chemistry with image question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Set the points required for the correct answer under the Set correct answer(s) section. Set the scoring method to equivLiteral and enter the appropriate values.
6. In the Responses menu, you can edit the ARIA label by toggling Edit ARIA label, toggle Ignore order, and choose whether or not to inverse the result by clicking Inverse result. To add additional scoring criteria, click the blue ADD button.
"Answer options for a cloze chemistry with image question"
Steps 5 & 6


7. Under the More options section, you can set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty points, toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
8. For scoring type, set it to Partial match per response to ensure that students get credit for partially correct answers or Exact answer if your question has only one response. Make sure Enable auto scoring is checked so the question is automatically graded.
9. You can set a minimum score if the student attempts the question (not recommended).
10. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
"More options and layout options for a cloze chemistry with image question"
Steps 7-10


11. Under the Keypad section, you can change the keypad Type by clicking the drop-down and selecting an option (Recommended: keep the keypad type as Floating so that the keypad only shows up once the student clicks on the response field).
12. Under the same menu, you can change all keys on the keypad under the Number pad section.
13. Again under the same menu, navigate to Symbols to add/delete the different Group/keyboard layouts you would like to make available to students. IMPORTANT: Make sure you add the Chemistry group under the Symbol section to ensure students will be able to answer the question using the built-in chemistry equations.
14. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Keypad, symbols and extra options for a cloze chemistry with image question"
Steps 11-14


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

15. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
16. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Steps 15 & 16


Note: Always test the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly and the system is registering the correct response.

Other

File Upload

  1. In the Compose question field, enter the question text. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under Photo capture using built-in camera(s) you can toggle Enable photo capture to allow students to use built-in/attached webcams to take pictures of their responses and submit it.
"Composing question for a file upload question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under Accepted file types you can specify the file types the students can submit. At the bottom of the menu you can also specify the Max files students are allowed to attach for the question.
"Accepted file options for a file upload question"
Step 3


4. Under the More options section, set the Max score (required), assign a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), toggle whether or not you would like students to Submit over limit by toggling the option as well as associate a rubric to the question by clicking the Manage rubrics button.
5. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question and adjust Font size.
6. Under Details you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample answer for future reference.
"More options, layout and details options for a file upload question"
Steps 4-6


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Details section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 7


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly. This question does not work in preview mode, meaning you cannot attach files when viewing a preview.

Image Annotation Upload

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. In the Image preview section, click edit to either upload an image or click the More options drop-down to enter the URL for an image you would like to host. In the same menu, you can adjust image dimensions.
  3. You can choose to add Image alternative text and modify the image dimensions.
"Composing question for an image annotation upload question"
Steps 1-3


4. Under the More options section, you can Enable auto scoring (currently does not work), set a Minimum score if attempted (not recommended), set the Max score (required) and attach a rubric or create a new one by clicking the Manage rubrics button.
5. Under Layout you can change the display formatting of the question, toggle whether or not the answer is Case sensitive and adjust Font size.
6. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"More options, layout and extra options for an image annotation upload question"
Steps 4-6


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

7. Questions that require manual grading cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 7


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Rating

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under each Rating #, where # is the rating number, specify the Value of the rating, the Label (the text that is displayed on the box), the Tooltip (the alternative text for that option), the Color to specify the color of the rating box once it is toggled, and a description if you would like to provide a description for the option.
"Composing question for a rating question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under More options, you can change the display formatting of the question, and adjust Font size.
4. Under Extras, you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"More options and extras for a rating question"
Steps 3 & 4


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

5. Questions that require manual grading/cannot be graded cannot be tested for correct answers, so when you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"
Step 5


Note: Always view the question in preview mode before saving it, to ensure you have set up the question properly.

Gridded

  1. In the Compose question field, enter instructions for the question. You can use rich text formatting to construct the question if desired.
  2. Under the Set correct answer(s) section, set the correct answer by under the Set correct answer(s) section by selecting the correct responses for each field.
"Composing question and answer options for a gridded question"
Steps 1 & 2


3. Under the More options section, you can specify the Default values of the grid, set the problem to be Unscored/Practice usage, assign Penalty point(s), toggle whether or not you would like for students to be able to check if their answer is correct and set the number of times a student is allowed to check their answer on the particular question.
4. Under the same menu, Enable auto scoring and set a Minimum score if attempted, if desired.
"More options for a gridded question"
Steps 3 & 4


5. Under Layout you can change the number of Columns, specify the Range of numbers to use, specify which symbols you want to make available ( Plus/minus column, Fraction slash, Fixed decimal, Floating decimal) and adjust Font size.
6. Under Extras you can reference the source of the question (textbook, website, etc.) in the Acknowledgments field and under Sample answer you can choose to include a sample reference for future reference.
"Layout and extra options for a gridded question"
Steps 5 & 6


Note: The Acknowledgments and Sample answer fields under the Extras section are for instructional use only and cannot be viewed by students, so feel free to use the two to take notes for future reference.

7. Once you are done editing the question options, click the Preview button to launch a student preview of the question to test it. Answer the question and click the Show Answers button to view the correct answer.
8. If the question works as intended and you are done making changes, click the Save button to add it to the question list.
"Save and preview buttons"